Foreword Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and CAU-

E09200108351 TION appear. These serve as reminders to be especially careful.

Thank you for selecting a MITSUBISHI MOTORS prod- Failure to follow instructions could result in personal injury or dam-
uct as your new vehicle. age to your vehicle.

This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full enjoy-
ment of the many fine features of this vehicle. Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way instructions are not followed.
to operate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost in driving pleasure.

MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION reserves the right to make

changes in design and specifications and/or to make additions to or Means hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor per-
improvements in this product without obligation to install them on sonal injury or damage to your vehicle.
products previously manufactured. You will see another important symbol:
It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws
and regulations concerning vehicles.
Gives helpful information.
This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such laws
and regulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory *: Indicates optional equipment.
with later amendment of the laws and regulations. It may differ according to the sales classification; refer to the sales
catalogue.
Please leave this owner’s manual in this vehicle at time of resale. The Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:
next owner will appreciate having access to the information contained
in this owner’s manual. M/T: Manual Transmission
A/T: Automatic Transmission
CVT: Continuously Variable Transmission
The symbol used on the vehicles:
: See owner’s manual

This vehicle is manufactured by PT. Mitsubishi Motors Krama Yudha

Indonesia in Indonesia under license from Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
tion.

©2019 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

Table of contents
Overview/Quick guide 1
General information 2
Locking and unlocking 3
Seat and seat belts 4
Instruments and controls 5
Starting and driving 6
For pleasant driving 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care 9
Maintenance 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
 Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

E08500103163

Combination headlamps and dipper switch P.5-38

Centre ventilators P.7-2, 7-3
Turn-signal lever P.5-40
Front fog lamp switch* P.5-41
Instruments P.5-2

Windscreen wiper and

washer switch P.5-42
Rear window wiper and
washer switch P.5-43
Steering wheel audio remote Side ventilators P.7-2, 7-3
control switches P.7-19
[For Display audio, refer to the
separate owner’s manual.] Multi-information display switch*
P.5-4

Switches for hands Electric remote-controlled outside

free calls* rear-view mirrors switch P.6-8

Active stability control (ASC) OFF

switch P.6-32
Supplemental restraint system
Cruise control switches* P.6-34
(SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat) Engine switch* P.6-11
P.4-23
Horn switch P.5-45 Ignition switch* P.6-10

1-1 Overview/Quick guide

 Instruments and controls

1
Audio* P.7-9
[For Display audio, refer to the sepa-
rate owner’s manual.] Hazard warning flasher switch
Supplemental restraint Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
P.5-41
system (SRS) - airbag lever P.6-6
(for front passenger’s
seat) P.4-23 Selector lever P.6-19

Bonnet release lever P.10-3

Parking brake lever P.6-4

Glove box P.7-36

Fuel tank filler door release

Fuses P.10-15 lever P.2-3

Air conditioning P.7-2

Manual air conditioning P.7-6
Rear window demister switch
P.5-44
USB input terminal* Accessory socket P.7-34
P.7-31

Drink holder P.7-39

Floor console box P.7-37
Accessory socket P.7-34

Overview/Quick guide 1-2

 Interior

1 Interior
E08500202558

Central door
lock switch
P.3-16 Accessory socket
P.7-34
Lock switch Bottle holder
P.3-24 P.7-39
Electric window Drink holder
control switch P.7-39
P.3-23

Room lamp (front) P.7-34 Seat belts

P.4-10
Inside rear-view mirror
P.6-7

Sun visors P.7-33

Vanity mirror P.7-33
Ticket holder P.7-33
Armrest P.4-5
Head restraints P.4-7

Passenger’s seat under tray P.7-38

Front seat P.4-4
Rear air conditioning P.7-8
Convenient hook P.7-40 Third seat P.4-7
Second seat P.4-5
Room lamp (rear) P.7-34

1-3 Overview/Quick guide

 Luggage area

Luggage area 1
E08500301666

Jack P.8-5
Tools P.8-5

Luggage floor board P.7-38

Luggage floor box P.7-36, 7-38
Tether anchorages for child restraint
system P.4-19

Overview/Quick guide 1-4

 Exterior - front

1 Exterior - front
E08500403704

Except for vehicles equipped with wheel lip moldings

Windscreen wipers Outside rear-view mirror
Electric window control P.3-23
P.5-42, 5-42, 10-13 P.6-8
Side turn-signal lamps Headlamps
P.10-20 P.5-38, 10-20, 10-21

Front turn-signal lamps

Bonnet P.10-3
P.10-20, 10-22

Front fog lamps*

P.5-41, 10-20, 10-23

Vehicles equipped with wheel lip moldings

Headlamps P.5-38, 10-20

Front turn-signal lamps

Fuel tank filler P.2-3 P.10-20, 10-22
Position lamps P.5-34, 10-20

Wheel lip moldings* Front fog lamps*

For details, refer to “Vehicle dimensions” P.5-41, 10-20
on page 11-3.

1-5 Overview/Quick guide

 Exterior - rear

Exterior - rear 1
E08500403717

Keyless entry system P.3-4

Keyless operation system* P.3-7
Locking and unlocking the doors P.3-8
High mounted stop lamp P.10-20
Antenna* P.7-30

Changing tyres P.8-6

Tailgate P.3-17
Tyre inflation pressures P.6-2, 10-11
Tyre rotation P.10-12
Size of tyres and wheels P.10-11, 11-6

Rear window wiper

P.5-43, 10-13

Tail lamps Tail lamps

P.10-20 P.10-20
Stop lamps
P.10-20, 10-23

Spare wheel P.8-6, 8-11

Rear-view camera* P.6-39
Rear turn-signal
Reversing lamps lamps
Licence plate lamps P.10-20, 10-24
P.10-20 P.10-20, 10-23

Overview/Quick guide 1-6

 Quick guide
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page
1 Quick guide 3-4. Driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch
E08500501059
The outside rear-view mirrors can be
retracted and extended automatically if you
Lock and unlock the doors and press the LOCK switch (1) or UNLOCK
tailgate switch (2).
E08500602233
Refer to “Operation of the outside rear-
view mirrors” on page 3-5.
Keyless entry system
Keyless operation system*
Press the key switch, and all doors and the
tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired. Tailgate lock/unlock switch
It is also possible to operate the outside rear- When you are carrying the keyless operation
view mirrors. key, if you press the driver’s or front passen-
The key switch will operate within approxi- ger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the tail-
mately 4 m from the vehicle. gate lock/unlock switch (B) within the
operating range, the doors and the tailgate are
locked.
Keyless entry key Keyless operation key
The operating range is approximately 70 cm
from the driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch, and tailgate lock/unlock
switch.
Refer to “Keyless operation system” on
page 3-7.

1- LOCK switch
2- UNLOCK switch
3- Indicator lamp

1-7 Overview/Quick guide

 Quick guide

Around the driver’s seat 1-Combination headlamps 1

E08500802378

Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.

1- Turn-signals
2- Lane-change signals

Refer “Turn-signal lever” on page 5-40.

OFF All lamps off

Position, tail, licence plate and
instrument panel lamps on
Headlamps and other lamps go
on

Refer “Combination headlamps and dip-

per switch” on page 5-38.

1-Turn-signal lever

The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is

operated (with the ignition switch or the oper-
ation mode is in ON).

Overview/Quick guide 1-8

 Quick guide

1 2-Steering wheel height and reach 3-Engine switch* 4-Wiper and washer switch
adjustment
If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
1. Release the lever while holding the steer- you can start the engine. If you press the
ing wheel up. engine switch without depressing the brake
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired pedal, you can change the operation mode in
position. the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull-
ing the lever fully upward.

MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
LO- Slow
HI- Fast
OFF- The indicator lamp on the engine
A- Locked switch turns off. The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
B- Release ACC- The indicator lamp on the engine windscreen by pulling the lever towards you.
switch illuminates orange.
ON- The indicator lamp on the engine Refer to “Wiper and washer switch” on
Refer “Steering wheel height and reach switch illuminates green. page 5-42.
adjustment” on page 6-6.

Refer “Engine switch” on page 6-11.

1-9 Overview/Quick guide

 Quick guide
Refer “Electric window control switch” on
5-Electric remote-controlled out- 6-Electric window control
page 3-23. 1
side rear-view mirrors
Each door window opens or closes while the
corresponding switch is operated. 7-Fuel tank filler door release
To adjust the mirror position
lever
Driver’s switches
The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left
side of your vehicle.
Open the fuel tank filler door with the release
lever located the side of the driver’s seat.

Push the switch (A) to the same side as the

1- Driver’s door window
mirror whose adjustment is desired.
2- Front passenger’s door window
L- Left outside mirror adjustment
3- Rear left door window
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
4- Rear right door window
5- Lock switch
Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or
down to adjust the mirror position.
1- Up Lock switch
2- Down Refer “Filling the fuel tank” on page 2-3.
3- Right When this switch (5) is operated, the passen-
4- Left ger’s switches cannot be used to open or close
5- Mirror retractor switch the door windows and the driver’s switch
cannot open or close any door windows other
Refer “Outside rear-view mirrors: Electric than the driver’s door window. To unlock,
remote-controlled outside rear-view mir- push it once again.
rors” on page 6-8.

Overview/Quick guide 1-10

 Quick guide

1 4-speed automatic transmission “N” NEUTRAL

E08502700058
At this position the transmission is disen-
gaged.
Selector lever operation
“D” DRIVE
The transmission has 4 forward gears and 1
reverse gear. This position is for normal driving.
The individual gears are selected automati-
cally, depending on the speed of the vehicle “2” SECOND
and the position of the accelerator pedal.
The selector lever has 6 positions, and is This position is for extra power when driving
The lock button must be pressed
equipped with a lock button (A) to avoid up moderately steep hills, and for engine
while the brake pedal is depressed to
inadvertent selection of the wrong gear. braking when descending moderately steep
move the selector lever.
gradients.
The lock button must be pressed to
move the selector lever.
“L” (LOW)
The lock button need not be pressed
to move the selector lever. This position is for driving up very steep hills
and for engine braking at low speeds when
driving down steep hills.
Selector lever positions
Overdrive control switch
“P” PARK
The overdrive control switch can be used
This position locks the transmission to pre-
while the selector lever is in the “D”
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
(DRIVE) position.
be started in this position.

“R” REVERSE

This position is to back up.

1-11 Overview/Quick guide

 Quick guide
ter, tripmeter, average and momentary fuel
 During normal driving
consumption, average speed etc. Type 2 1
Press the overdrive control switch to turn the
overdrive function on. Type 1

 During hilly roads driving

Press the overdrive control switch to turn the

overdrive function off.

1- Engine coolant temperature display

 P.5-19
2- Selector lever position indicator dis-
1- mark display  P.5-6 play  P.6-20
2- “ ” or “ ” mark indicator  P.5-5 3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-19
4- Information display  P.5-17
3- Information screen  P.5-4
5- Service reminder  P.5-20
Interrupt display screen  P.5-5
4- Odometer  P.5-7
Refer “Multi-information display - Type
1” on page 5-3 or “Multi-information dis-
play - Type 2” on page 5-16.
Refer to “4-speed automatic transmission”
on page 6-19.

Multi-information display
E08501201662

Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before

operating.
The following information is included on the
multi-information display: warnings, odome-

Overview/Quick guide 1-12

General information
2

Fuel selection ...................................................................................2-2

Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................2-3
Installation of accessories ................................................................2-4
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems ................2-5
Genuine parts ...................................................................................2-5
Used engine oils safety instructions ................................................2-6
Event Data Recording ......................................................................2-6
 Fuel selection

Fuel selection CAUTION Except for vehicles for Sri Lanka

 Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
2
E00200105836
taining methanol. Using this type of alcohol A mixture of up to 20 % ethanol (grain alco-
Unleaded petrol octane could adversely affect the vehicle’s perfor- hol) and 80 % unleaded petrol may be used in
Recommended
number mance and damage critical parts of the vehi- your vehicle, provided the octane number is
fuel
90 RON or higher cle’s fuel system. at least as high as that recommended for
unleaded petrol.
NOTE
CAUTION  Repeatedly driving short distance at low CAUTION
 The use of leaded fuel can result in serious speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel  Do not use more than 20 % concentration of
damage to the engine and catalytic converter. system and engine, resulting in poor starting ethanol (grain alcohol) by volume.
Do not use the leaded fuel. and poor acceleration. If these problems Use of more than 20 % concentration may
occur, you are advised to add a detergent lead to damage to your vehicle fuel system,
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the engine, engine sensors and exhaust system.
Ethanol (Gasohol) vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-  Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
its, thereby returning the engine to a normal taining methanol. Using this type of alcohol
condition. Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI could adversely affect the vehicle’s perfor-
Vehicles for Sri Lanka MOTORS GENUINE FUEL SYSTEM mance and damage critical parts of the vehi-
CLEANER. Using an unsuitable additive cle’s fuel system.
A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco- could make the engine malfunction. For
hol) and 90 % unleaded petrol may be used in details, please contact the nearest authorised
your vehicle, provided the octane number is MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
at least as high as that recommended for  Poor quality petrol can cause problems such
unleaded petrol. as hard starting, stalling, engine noise and
hesitation. If you experience these problems,
try another brand and/or grade of petrol.
CAUTION If the check engine warning lamp flashes,
 Do not use more than 10 % concentration of have the system checked as soon as possible
ethanol (grain alcohol) by volume. at an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Use of more than 10 % concentration may dealer.
lead to damage to your vehicle fuel system,
engine, engine sensors and exhaust system.

2-2 General information

 Filling the fuel tank

NOTE WARNING Refuelling

 Repeatedly driving short distance at low  Fuel is highly flammable and explosive.
speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel You could be burned or seriously injured 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. 2
system and engine, resulting in poor starting when handling it. When refuelling your 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
and poor acceleration. If these problems vehicle, always turn the engine off and left side of your vehicle.
occur, you are advised to add a detergent keep away from flames, sparks, and smok- Open the fuel tank filler door with the
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the ing materials. Always handle fuel in well- release lever located the side of the
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos- ventilated outdoor areas. driver’s seat.
its, thereby returning the engine to a normal  Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to
condition. Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI get rid of your body’s static electricity by
MOTORS GENUINE FUEL SYSTEM touching a metal part of the car or fuel
CLEANER. Using an unsuitable additive pump. Any static electricity on your body
could make the engine malfunction. For could create a spark that ignites fuel
details, please contact the nearest authorised vapor.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.  Perform the whole refuelling process
 Poor quality petrol can cause problems such (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
as hard starting, stalling, engine noise and ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not
hesitation. If you experience these problems, let any other person come near the fuel
try another brand and/or grade of petrol. tank filler. If you allowed a person to help
If the check engine warning lamp flashes, you and that person was carrying static
have the system checked as soon as possible electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
at an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS 3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly
 Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
dealer. turning the cap anticlockwise.
until refuelling is finished. If you moved
away and did something else (for example,
sitting on a seat) part-way through the
Filling the fuel tank refuelling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
E00200204801
 If the tank cap must be replaced, use only
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine part.
WARNING
 When handling fuel, comply with the
safety regulations displayed by garages Fuel tank capacity
and filling stations.
45 litres

General information 2-3

 Installation of accessories

NOTE Installation of accessories

 While filling with fuel, store the cap in the
2
E00200302707
cap holder located on the inside of the fuel
Before fitting any accessories, please consult
tank filler door.
an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.

CAUTION
 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis
connector for checking and servicing the
electronic control system.
1- Remove
Do not connect a device other than a diagno-
2- Close
sis tool for inspections and service to this
connector. Otherwise, the battery could be
4. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it discharged, the electronic devices of the
CAUTION vehicle could malfunction, or other unex-
goes.
 Since the fuel system may be under pressure, pected problems could result.
remove the fuel tank filler tube cap slowly. In addition, malfunctions caused by connect-
This relieves any pressure or vacuum that CAUTION ing a device other than a diagnosis tool may
might have built up in the fuel tank. If you  Do not tilt the gun. not be covered under warranty.
hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel 5. When the gun stops automatically, do not  The installation of accessories, optional
may spray out, injuring you or others.
fill with fuel any more. parts, etc., should only be carried out
6. To close, turn the fuel tank filler tube cap within the limits prescribed by law in your
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking country, and in accordance with the guide-
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank lines and warnings contained within the
filler door closed. documents accompanying this vehicle.
Only MITSUBISHI MOTORS approved
accessories should be fitted to your vehi-
cle.

2-4 General information

 Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems
 Improper installation of electrical parts mit” (an appraisal for the part) or through the
could cause a fire. Refer to the section execution of the part in an officially approved Modification/alterations to
entitled “Modifications to and alterations manner of construction, or when a single the electrical or fuel systems 2
of the electrical or fuel systems” in this operation permit following the attachment or E00200401600

owner’s manual. installation of such parts, it cannot be MITSUBISHI MOTORS has always manu-
 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside deduced from that alone, that the driving factured safe, high quality vehicles. In order
the vehicle without an external antenna safety of your vehicles has not been affected. to maintain this safety and quality, it is impor-
may cause electrical system interference, tant that any accessory that is to be fitted, or
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- Consider also that there basically exists no
any modifications carried out which involve
tion. liability on the part of the appraiser or the
the electrical or fuel systems, should be car-
 Tyres and wheels which do not meet spec- official. Only in the case of parts
ried out in accordance with MITSUBISHI
ifications must not be used. (MITSUBISHI MOTORS original replace-
MOTORS guidelines.
For details on wheel and tyre sizes, refer ment or exchange parts as well as
to the section entitled “Specifications”. MITSUBISHI MOTORS accessories) that
 Do not fail to read the accessories manu- are recommended and released by an author- CAUTION
als prior to the installation of accessories, ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer and that  Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
are attached or installed by an authorised MOTORS dealer concerning any such fit-
parts or other modifications to the vehi-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer can you ment or modification.
cle!
assume, that optimal safety has been pro- If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
improper installation methods are used (pro-
vided. The same also pertains to modifica-
Important points! tions of vehicles with respect to the
tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
devices may be adversely affected, resulting
production specifications. For your own in a fire or other accident.
Due to the large number of accessory and safety, in such cases as well, you should only
replacement parts of different manufactures undertake modifications according to the rec-
in the market, it is not possible, not only for ommendations of an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION, MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Genuine parts
but also an authorised MITSUBISHI E00200502099

MOTORS dealer, to check whether the Don’t play around with substitutes.
attachment or installation of such parts affects MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great
the driving safety of your vehicle. lengths to bring you a superbly crafted vehi-
cle offering the highest quality and dependa-
Even when such parts are officially author- bility. Don’t reduce that quality and
ised, for example by a “general operators per- dependability by using substitute parts.

General information 2-5

 Used engine oils safety instructions
Always use MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genu-
ine Parts designed and manufactured to main- Event Data Recording NOTE
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
2 tain your vehicle at top performance. The E00205900166
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
operation of vehicle components can be less This vehicle is equipped with an event data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
efficient in case of using Non-Genuine Parts. recorder (EDR). ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
Failure to use Genuine Parts may invalidate The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in name, gender, age, and crash location) are
any future warranty claim. MITSUBISHI certain crash or near crash-like situations, recorded. However, other parties, such as
MOTORS will not be liable for any malfunc- such as an airbag deployment or hitting a law enforcement, could combine the EDR
tion of your vehicle that may have been road obstacle, data that will assist in under- data with the type of personally identifying
caused by the use of substitute parts in place standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. data routinely acquired during a crash inves-
of MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts. The EDR is designed to record data related to tigation.
At the MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer you vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
can also get appropriate advice and the short period of time, typically 30 seconds or To read data recorded by an EDR, special
assembling of Genuine Parts will be handled less. equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
professionally. cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts are The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
indicated as GENUINE PARTS, and are such data as:
law enforcement, that have the special equip-
available at all authorised MITSUBISHI ment, can read the information if they have
 How various systems in your vehicle were
MOTORS dealers. access to the vehicle or the EDR.
operating;
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
Used engine oils safety ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
instructions  How fast the vehicle was travelling.
E00200601501

WARNING These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which
 Prolonged and repeated contact may
cause serious skin disorders, including crashes and injuries occur.
dermatitis and cancer.
 Avoid contact with the skin as far as possi-
ble and wash thoroughly after any con-
tact.
 Keep out of reach of children.

2-6 General information

Locking and unlocking

3
Keys .................................................................................................3-2
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................3-3
Keyless entry system .......................................................................3-4
Keyless operation system* ...............................................................3-7
Doors ..............................................................................................3-15
Central door locks ..........................................................................3-16
“Child-protection” rear doors ........................................................3-17
Tailgate ..........................................................................................3-17
Security alarm system ....................................................................3-19
Electric window control .................................................................3-23
 Keys

Keys NOTE NOTE

E00300104768  The key (except for the emergency key) is a  Pay attention to the following if the security
precision electronic part with a built-in sig- alarm is set to “Active”.
Keyless entry key nal transmitter. Please observe the following Refer to “Security alarm system” on page
3 in order to prevent a malfunction. 3-19.
• Do not leave anywhere that is exposed to • If the security alarm is in the system armed
direct sunlight, for example on the dash- mode, the alarm will sound if the doors are
board. opened after being unlocked with the key,
• Do not disassemble or modify. the inside lock knob or the central door lock
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject switch.
Keyless operation key it to a strong impact. • Even if the security alarm is set to
• Do not expose to water. “Active”, the system preparation mode is
• Keep away from magnetic key rings. not entered if the keyless entry system or
the keyless operation function was not used
• Keep away from audio systems, personal
to lock the vehicle.
computers, TVs, and any other equipment
that generates a magnetic field.
• Keep away from devices that emit strong Key number tag
1- Keyless entry key electromagnetic waves, such as cellular E00314000122
2- Keyless operation key phones, wireless devices and high fre-
quency equipment (including medical The key number is stamped on the tag as indi-
3- Emergency key
devices). cated in the illustration.
• Do not wash with ultrasonic cleaners or Make a record of the key number and store
the key and key number tag in separate
WARNING similar equipment.
places, so that you can order a key from your
• Do not leave the key where it may be
 When taking a key on flights, do not press
exposed to high temperature or high humid- authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer in
any switches on the key while on the
plane. If a switch is pressed on the plane,
ity. the event the original keys are lost.
the key emits electromagnetic waves,  The engine is designed so that it will not start
which could adversely affect the plane’s if the ID code registered in the immobilizer
flight operation. computer and the key’s ID code do not
When carrying a key in a bag, be careful match. For details on that and on key usage,
that no switches on the key can be easily refer to the section entitled “Electronic
pressed by mistake. immobilizer”.

3-2 Locking and unlocking

 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

NOTE NOTE
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the key- • When the key contacts or is close to other
less operation system] immobilizing keys (including keys of other
In the following cases, the vehicle may not vehicles)
be able to receive the registered ID code 3
from the registered key and engine may not
start.
• When the key contacts a key ring or other
metallic or magnetic object

1- Keyless entry key

2- Emergency key

In cases like these, remove the object or

Electronic immobilizer additional key from the vehicle key. Then
try again to start the engine. If the engine
(Anti-theft starting system) does not start, contact an authorised
E00300204121 • When the key grip contacts metal of MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
another key  [Vehicles equipped with the keyless opera-
CAUTION tion system]
 Don’t make any alterations or additions to If the engine does not start, we recommend
the immobilizer system; alterations or addi- you to contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer. MOTORS dealer.
 If you lose one of them, contact an author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon
The electronic immobilizer is designed to
as possible. To obtain a replacement or extra
reduce significantly the possibility of vehicle spare key, take your vehicle and all remain-
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo- ing keys to an authorised MITSUBISHI
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is MOTORS dealer. All the keys have to be re-
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be registered in the immobilizer computer unit.
achieved, using a key “registered” to the For further information, please contact an
immobilizer system. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

Locking and unlocking 3-3

 Keyless entry system

Keyless entry system To unlock NOTE

E00300305233 • The confirmation function (this indicates
Press the UNLOCK switch (2). All the doors locking or unlocking of the doors and the
Press the key switch, and all doors and the
tailgate with the blink of the turn-signal
3 tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired. and the tailgate will be unlocked. If the room
lamps) can be deactivated.
It is also possible to operate the outside rear- lamp switch is in the “” or the “DOOR”
• The number of times the turn-signal lamps
view mirrors. position at this time, the room lamp will come
are blinked by the confirmation function
on for approximately 15 seconds and the can be changed.
turn-signal lamps will blink twice. • On vehicles equipped with the keyless
Keyless entry key Keyless operation key Also, the position and tail lamps will turn on operation system, the buzzer can be set to
for approximately 30 seconds. sound when the vehicle is locked or
Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-39 in the unlocked using the switches of the keyless
section entitled “Instruments and controls”. operation key.
 The keyless entry system does not operate in
the following conditions:
NOTE
• The key is left in the ignition switch.
 The outside rear-view mirrors automatically
(except for vehicles equipped with the key-
retract or extend when all the doors and the
less operation system)
tailgate are locked or unlocked using the key
• The operation mode is not in OFF. (vehicles
1- LOCK switch switches of the keyless entry system. Refer
equipped with the keyless operation sys-
to “Outside rear-view mirrors” on page 6-8
2- UNLOCK switch tem)
in the section entitled “Starting and driving”.
3- Indicator lamp • The door or tailgate is open.
 If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and no
door or tailgate is opened within approxi-  The key switch will operate within approxi-
mately 30 seconds, relocking will automati- mately 4 m from the vehicle. However, the
To lock cally occur. operating range of the key switch may
change if the vehicle is located near a power
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
station, or radio/TV broadcasting station.
Press the LOCK switch (1). All the doors and For further information, please contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.  If either of the following problems occurs,
the tailgate will be locked. The turn-signal the battery may be exhausted.
lamps will blink once. When they are locked • The time for automatic relocking can be
changed. • The key switch is operated at the correct
with the room lamp switch in the “” or the distance from the vehicle, but the doors and
• Activating the operation confirmation func-
“DOOR” position, the room lamp also blink the tailgate are not locked/unlocked in
tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) only
once. during locking, or only during unlocking.
response.

3-4 Locking and unlocking

 Keyless entry system

NOTE To extend NOTE

• The indicator lamp (3) is dim or does not The outside rear-view mirrors can be
come on. Unlocking the doors and tailgate using the retracted or extended by the following opera-
For further information, please contact an tions, even if changing to the any of above.
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
UNLOCK switch (2), the outside rear-view
mirrors are extended automatically. After pressing the LOCK switch to lock the 3
If you replace the battery yourself, refer to doors and tailgate, if the LOCK switch is
“Procedure for replacing the key battery” pressed again twice in a row within approxi-
on page 3-5. NOTE mately 30 seconds, the outside rear-view
 If your key is lost or damaged, please contact  Functions can be modified as stated below. mirrors will retract.
an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI After pressing the UNLOCK switch to
dealer for a replacement key. MOTORS dealer. unlock the doors and tailgate, if the
 If you wish to add key, please contact an • Automatically extend when the driver’s UNLOCK switch is pressed again twice in a
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. door is closed and the ignition switch is row within approximately 30 seconds, the
The following numbers of the keys are avail- turned to the “ON” position or the opera- outside rear-view mirrors will extend again.
able. tion mode is put in ON.
• Keyless entry key: up to four different keys In addition, automatically retract when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” or
Procedure for replacing the key
• Keyless operation key: up to four different
keys “ACC” position or the operation mode is battery
put in OFF or ACC, and the driver’s door is E00309502413

then opened.
Operation of the outside rear- • Automatically extend when the vehicle WARNING
view mirrors speed reaches approximately 30 km/h.  Do not swallow a coin type battery.
E00310802096 • Deactivate the automatic extension func- • This product contains coin type battery.
tion. If a coin type battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns and can lead
To retract to death.
There have been cases where a swallowed
Locking the doors and tailgate using the battery has caused severe internal burns
LOCK switch (1), the outside rear-view mir- in just 2 hours.
rors are retracted automatically. • Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
• If the key case does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away
from children.

Locking and unlocking 3-5

 Keyless entry system
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
WARNING electricity from your body by touching a Keyless entry key
• If you think batteries might have been
metal grounded object.
swallowed or placed inside any part of a
2. Remove the screw (A) from the key.
person’s body, seek immediate medical
3 attention. (Keyless entry key only)
 To prevent an explosion or leakage of Keyless entry key
flammable liquid or gas:
• Do not replace the battery with an incor-
rect type. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type.
• Do not dispose of a battery into a fire or
incinerator, or by mechanically crushing
or cutting the battery. Keyless operation key
• Do not use, store, or take a battery any
place where it may be exposed to
extremely high temperature or extremely
low air pressure.
3. Remove the emergency key from the key.
(Keyless operation key only)
CAUTION Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-11.
 When the key case is opened, be careful to
4. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you,
keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight
the internal components. blade (or minus) screwdriver into the
 Dispose of used battery according to the reg- notch in the key case and use it to open
ulations for the disposal of battery. the case. NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the
MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when
NOTE you open the key case, the switches may
 You may purchase a replacement battery at come out.
an electric appliance store.
 An authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer can replace the battery for you if you 5. Remove the used battery.
prefer.

3-6 Locking and unlocking

 Keyless operation system*
6. Install a new battery with the + side (B)
up. Keyless operation system*
E00305602692
Keyless entry key
+ side The keyless operation system allows you to
lock and unlock the doors and the tailgate, 3
start the engine and change the operation
- side mode simply by carrying the keyless opera-
tion key with you.
Coin type The switches on the keyless operation key
battery can also be used as the key switch of keyless
CR1620 entry system.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”
on page 6-15.
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-4.
Keyless operation key
+ side
The driver should always carry the keyless WARNING
operation key. This key is necessary for lock-  When using electro-medical devices other
- side ing and unlocking the doors and the tailgate, than implantable cardiac pacemakers or
starting the engine and otherwise operating implantable cardiovascular-defibrilla-
the vehicle, so before locking and leaving the tors, contact the electro-medical device
Coin type manufacturer ahead of time to determine
vehicle, be sure to check that you have the
battery the adverse effects of radio waves on the
CR2032
keyless operation key.
devices. Electro-medical device operations
could be affected by radio waves.
WARNING
7. Close the key case firmly.  People with implantable cardiac pacemak-
8. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2. You can limit the possible operations of the
ers or implantable cardiovascular-defi-
(Keyless entry key only) brillators should not go near the exterior keyless operation system in the following
9. Install the emergency key removed in step transmitters (A) or the interior transmit- ways. (The keyless operation system can be
3. (Keyless operation key only) ters (B). The radio waves used by the key- used as a keyless entry system.) Please con-
10. Check the keyless entry system to see that less operation system could adversely sult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
it works. affect implantable cardiac pacemakers or dealer.
implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators.

Locking and unlocking 3-7

 Keyless operation system*
 You can limit operations to locking and
unlocking the doors and tailgate.
NOTE NOTE
 Because the keyless operation key receives  If the keyless operation key battery is wear-
 You can limit operations to starting the
signals in order to communicate with the ing out or there are strong electromagnetic
engine.
transmitters in the vehicle, the battery con- waves or noise present, the operating range
3  The keyless operation system can be disa- tinually wears down regardless of keyless may become smaller and operation may
bled. operation key use. The battery life is 1 to become unstable.
2 years, depending on usage conditions.
When the battery wears out, replace the bat-
NOTE tery according to the description in this man-
 The keyless operation key uses an ultra-weak Operating range for locking and
ual or have it replaced an authorised
electromagnetic wave. In the following
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. unlocking the doors and tailgate
cases, the keyless operation system may not
Refer to “Procedure for replacing the key E00306201760
operate properly or may be unstable. The operating range is approximately 70 cm
battery” on page 3-5.
• When there is equipment nearby that emits from the driver’s or front passenger’s door
 Because the keyless operation key continu-
strong radio waves, such as: a power sta- lock/unlock switch, and tailgate lock/unlock
ally receives signals, strong radio wave
tion, a radio/TV broadcasting station or an
reception could affect battery wear. Do not switch.
airport.
leave the key near a TV, personal computer,
• The keyless operation system is carried or other electronic device.
together with a communications device
such as a cellular phone or radio set, or with
an electronic device such as a personal Operating range of the keyless
computer. operation system
• The keyless operation key is touching or
E00305701898
covered by a metal object.
• A keyless entry system is being used If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
nearby. enter the operating range of the keyless oper-
• When the keyless operation key battery is ation system, and press the driver’s or front
worn out. passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tail-
• When the keyless operation key is set down gate lock/unlock switch, the ID code for your
*: Forward direction
in an area with strong radio waves or noise. key is verified.
In such cases, use the emergency key. You can lock and unlock the doors and the : Operating range
Refer to “To lock/unlock without using the tailgate, start the engine and change the oper-
keyless operation function” on page 3-11. ation mode only if the ID codes of your key-
less operation key and the vehicle match.

3-8 Locking and unlocking

 Keyless operation system*

NOTE To operate using the keyless

 Locking and unlocking operate only when operation function
you press a door or tailgate switch that E00305803301
detects the keyless operation key.
 Operation may not be possible if you are too Driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock 3
close to the front door, door window or tail- switch
gate.
 Even if the keyless operation key is within
70 cm of the driver’s or front passenger’s
door lock/unlock switch or tailgate
lock/unlock switch, if the key is near to the
ground or high up, the system may not oper- *: Forward direction
ate. : Operating range
 If the keyless operation key is within the
operating range, even someone not carrying
the key can lock and unlock the doors and NOTE
tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front pas-  Even if it is within the operating range, if the Tailgate lock/unlock switch
senger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tail- keyless operation key is in a small item
gate lock/unlock switch. holder such as the glove box, on top of the
instrument panel, door pocket or in the lug-
gage compartment, it may be impossible to
Operating range for starting the start the engine and change the operation
engine and changing the opera- mode.
 If a keyless operation key is too close to the
tion mode door or door window, it may be possible to
E00306301569
start the engine or change the operation
The operating range is the interior of the mode even when the key is outside the vehi-
vehicle. cle.

Locking the doors and tailgate

When you are carrying the keyless operation

key, if you press the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the tail-
Locking and unlocking 3-9
 Keyless operation system*
gate lock/unlock switch (B) within the
Unlocking the doors and tailgate NOTE
operating range, the doors and the tailgate are
 The time between unlocking and automatic
locked.
When you are carrying the keyless operation locking can be adjusted. Please consult an
The turn-signal lamps will blink once and the
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
3 outer buzzer will sound once. key, if you press the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the tail-
For further details, refer to “Doors”, “Central
gate lock/unlock switch (B) within the Operation confirmation when locking
door locks” and “Tailgate” on pages 3-15,
operating range, all the doors and the tailgate and unlocking
3-16 and 3-17 in the section entitled “Lock-
ing and unlocking”. are unlocked.
Operation can be confirmed as shown below.
If the room lamp switch is in the “” or the
However, the room lamp will illuminate only
“DOOR” position at this time, the room lamp
NOTE will turn on for 15 seconds. The turn-signal
if the room lamp switch is in the “” or the
 Be sure to have the keyless operation key “DOOR” position.
lamps will blink twice and the outer buzzer
with you before locking the vehicle. Even if When locking: The turn-signal lamps blink
will sound twice.
the keyless operation key is left in the vehi- once and the outer buzzer sounds once.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s door
cle in the glove box or other small storage When unlocking: The room lamp illuminates
compartment, near the instrument panel, or lock/unlock switch is pressed and any of the
for approximately 15 seconds, and the turn-
in the luggage compartment, the vehicle may doors or tailgate is not opened within approx-
signal lamps blink twice, and the outer buzzer
be locked depending on the radio waves and imately 30 seconds, relocking will automati-
sounds twice.
other conditions in the surrounding environ- cally occur.
ment, trapping the key inside the vehicle. For further details, refer to “Doors”, “Central
 The outside rear-view mirrors automatically door locks” and “Tailgate” on pages 3-15, NOTE
retract when all the doors and tailgate are 3-16 and 3-17 in the section entitled “Lock-  Functions can be modified as stated below.
locked using the keyless operation function. ing and unlocking”. For further information, please contact an
Refer to “Outside rear-view mirrors” on page authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
6-8. • Activating the operation confirmation func-
 The keyless operation function does not NOTE tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) only
operate under the following conditions:  The outside rear-view mirrors automatically during locking, or only during unlocking.
• The keyless operation key is inside the extend when all the doors and the tailgate are • Disabling the operation confirmation func-
vehicle. unlocked using the keyless operation func- tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) and
• A door or the tailgate is open or ajar. tion. Refer to “Outside rear-view mirrors” on outer buzzer.
page 6-8 in the section entitled “Starting and • Changing the number of blinks for the
• The operation mode is not in OFF.
driving”. operation confirmation function (blinking
 The keyless operation key does not operate of the turn-signal lamps).
when the operation mode is not in OFF.

3-10 Locking and unlocking

 Keyless operation system*

To lock/unlock without using Locking and unlocking the door

the keyless operation function Turning the emergency key in the forward
E00306001221
direction locks the door, and turning it in the
rear direction unlocks the door. For further 3
Emergency key details, refer to “Doors” on page 3-15 in the
E00307201839 section entitled “Locking and unlocking”.
The emergency key (A) can only be used to
lock and unlock the door. To use the emer-
gency key, unlock the lock knob (B) and
remove it from the keyless operation key (C).
NOTE
 Only use the emergency key for emergen-
cies. If the keyless operation key battery
wears out, replace it as quickly as possible so
that you can use the keyless operation key.
 The emergency key is built in the keyless
operation key.
 After using the emergency key, always return 1- Lock
it into the original position. 2- Unlock

Warning activation
E00305902334

In order to prevent vehicle theft or the accidental operation of the keyless operation system, the buzzer and the display on the information screen
in the multi-information display are used to alert the driver.
If a warning is activated, always check the vehicle and the keyless operation key. The warning is also displayed if there is a fault in the keyless
operation system.

Item Display Buzzer Note (Solution)

Detection of failure Inner buzzer sounds There is a fault in the keyless operation system.
once

Locking and unlocking 3-11

 Keyless operation system*
Item Display Buzzer Note (Solution)
Fall of battery voltage Inner buzzer sounds The battery starts to run out, the warning is activated. (The warning is
once not activated if the battery is completely dead.)
3 Key not detected Engine switch is Inner buzzer sounds When the engine switch is pressed to change the operation mode from
pressed one time once OFF or when the engine is started, the warning is activated, if any of the
following conditions has occurred.

• Carrying another keyless operation key with a different code, or the

Engine switch is keyless operation key could be outside the operating range.
pressed two times or • The battery of the keyless operation key is dead.
more • Communication is blocked by electric wave environment.
In such case, touch the keyless operation key to the engine switch to
change the operation mode or start the engine.
Refer to “If the keyless operation key is not operating properly” on page
6-18.

3-12 Locking and unlocking

 Keyless operation system*
Item Display Buzzer Note (Solution)
Keyless operation Inner buzzer sounds • When the vehicle is parked with the operation mode in any mode
key take-out monitor- once other than OFF, if you close the door after opening any of the doors
ing system Outer buzzer sounds and taking the keyless operation key out of the vehicle, a warning is
intermittently issued until the key is detected in the vehicle.
3
• If you take the keyless operation key out of the vehicle through a win-
dow without opening a door, the keyless operation key take-out moni-
toring system does not operate.
• It is possible to change the setting to make the keyless operation key
take-out monitoring system operate if you take the keyless operation
key out from the vehicle through a window without opening a door.
For further information, please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
• Even if you have the keyless operation key within the engine start
operating range, if the keyless operation key and vehicle ID codes
cannot be matched, for example due to the ambient environment or
electromagnetic conditions, the warning may be activated.
Key lock-in preven- Inner buzzer sounds • When the operation mode is in OFF, if you close all the doors and the
tion system once tailgate with the keyless operation key left in the vehicle and you try
Outer buzzer sounds to lock the doors and tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front passen-
approximately 3 sec- ger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate lock/unlock switch, a
onds intermittently warning is issued and you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
• Make sure you have the keyless operation key with you before lock-
ing the doors. Even if you leave the keyless operation key inside the
vehicle, it is possible that the doors will lock depending on the sur-
rounding environment and wireless signal conditions.
Door ajar prevention Inner buzzer sounds When the operation mode in OFF, if you try to lock the doors and tail-
system once gate by pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
Outer buzzer sounds switch, or the tailgate lock/unlock switch with one of the doors or the
approximately 3 sec- tailgate not completely closed, a warning is issued and you cannot lock
onds intermittently the doors and tailgate.

Locking and unlocking 3-13

 Keyless operation system*
Item Display Buzzer Note (Solution)
Operation mode OFF Inner buzzer sounds When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF, if you try to
reminder system once lock the doors and tailgate by pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s
Outer buzzer sounds door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate lock/unlock switch, a warning is
3 approximately 3 sec- issued and you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
onds intermittently

3-14 Locking and unlocking

 Doors

Doors NOTE NOTE

E00300403908  When locking or unlocking with the key, all  The driver’s door can be opened without
doors and the tailgate will be locked or using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
CAUTION unlocked. door handle.
 Make sure the doors are closed: driving with Refer to “Central door locks” on page 3-16. 3
doors not completely closed is dangerous.  If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless
 Never leave children in the vehicle unat- operation system, all doors and the tailgate To lock without using the key
tended. can be locked or unlocked with the emer-
 Be careful not to lock the doors while the gency key. Refer to “Emergency key” on
key is inside the vehicle. page 3-11.

To lock or unlock with the key To lock or unlock from inside

the vehicle

Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked

position, and close the door (2).

Ignition key reminder

E00300501152
1- Lock
2- Unlock 1- Lock
Except for vehicles equipped with
2- Unlock
the keyless operation system

If the driver’s door is opened while the key is

in the ignition switch, a buzzer will sound to
remind you to remove the key.

Locking and unlocking 3-15

 Central door locks

Vehicles equipped with the keyless 2- Unlock

Central door locks
operation system
NOTE
E00300803713

NOTE  If the vehicle is equipped with the keyless

3 If the driver’s door is opened with the engine
 Repeated continuous operation between lock operation system, the driver’s door can be
stopped and the operation mode in any mode locked or unlocked with the emergency key.
and unlock could activate the central door
other than OFF, a buzzer will sound to remind Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-11.
locking systems built-in protection circuit
you to put the operation mode in OFF.
and prevent the system from operating. If
Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder sys- this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute
tem” on page 6-13. before operating the central door lock sys- The central door lock switch
tem.
“Forgotten-key-prevention” Using the central door lock switch on the
mechanism All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked driver’s door locks or unlocks all doors and
E00300601397 and unlocked as described hereafter. the tailgate.
If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-
ation mode is in any mode other than OFF, Driver’s door with key
the lock knob will automatically return to the
unlocked position if you push the lock knob Using the key on the driver’s door locks or
forward or press the central door lock switch unlocks all doors and the tailgate.
to lock the doors with the driver’s door open.

1- Lock
2- Unlock

1- Lock

3-16 Locking and unlocking

 “Child-protection” rear doors

Unlock using the ignition “Child-protection” rear CAUTION

switch, the engine switch or the doors  When driving with a child in the rear seat,
please use the child protection to prevent
selector lever E00300902270
accidental door opening which may cause an
accident. 3
It is possible to unlock all of the doors and the
tailgate whenever as follows.
The selector lever placed the “P” (PARK) Tailgate
position while the ignition switch or the oper- E00301403022
ation mode is in ON.
Or the ignition switch is turned to the WARNING
“LOCK” position or the operation mode is  Luggage compartment is not designed to
put in OFF. ride for people. Do not let people ride or
children play there. This could result in a
These functions are deactivated when the serious accident.
1- Lock
vehicle is shipped from the factory. If you  It is dangerous to drive with the tailgate
2- Unlock
wish to activate or deactivate these functions, open, since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI enter the cabin.
MOTORS dealer. Child protection helps prevent the rear doors You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
from being opened accidentally from the unconsciousness and even death.
inside. And also, if opening the tailgate while
If the lever is set to the locked position, the driving, luggage may fall from the tail-
rear door cannot be opened using the inside gate. This could result in a serious acci-
dent.
handle, but only with the outside handle.
 When opening and closing the tailgate,
If the lever is set to the unlock position (2),
make sure of the surrounding safety and
the child protection mechanism does not keep enough space for back and upper of
function. the vehicle and be careful not to hit your
head or pinch your hands, neck, etc.

Locking and unlocking 3-17

 Tailgate

WARNING
 When there is a build up of snow or ice, it
should be removed before opening the tail-
gate. If you open the tailgate without
3 removing it, there is a possibility that the
tailgate may close suddenly due to the
weight of that snow or ice.
 When you open the tailgate make sure
that the tailgate is opened fully and
remains fully open. If you only open the
tailgate halfway there is a risk that the
tailgate may drop and slam shut. If you 1- Lock
open the tailgate while your vehicle is 2- Unlock
parked on an incline it is more difficult to To close
do so than on the flat and also it may drop
and slam shut. NOTE Pull the tailgate grip (A) downward as illus-
 Repeated continuous operating between lock
trated. Gently slam the tailgate from the out-
and unlock could cause the central door
side so that it is completely closed. Always
CAUTION locks’ built-in protection circuit to prevent
the system from operating. If this occurs, ensure the tailgate is securely closed.
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from wait approximately 1 minute before operat-
the exhaust could lead to burns. ing the central door lock switch.
 To avoid damage to the tailgate, make sure
the area above and behind the tailgate is
clear before opening it. To open

Unlock the tailgate, and then lift the tailgate

To lock/unlock while pulling the handle.

The tailgate can be locked or unlocked by

using the central door lock switch (driver
side).

3-18 Locking and unlocking

 Security alarm system

CAUTION Security alarm system The security alarm has four

 When closing the tailgate, do not close it E00301502550 modes:
directly putting the hands on the tailgate
The security alarm system is for alerting the
grip. If the hands or arms got caught, a seri-
ous injury could result.
surrounding area of suspicious behaviour to 3
prevent unlawful entry into the vehicle by System preparation mode
operating an alarm if a door or the tailgate is (approximately 20 seconds)
NOTE opened when the vehicle has not been
unlocked using the keyless entry system or
 Gas struts (B) are installed to support the (The buzzer sounds intermittently and the
tailgate.
the keyless operation function.
security indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter blinks.)
CAUTION
 Do not modify or add parts to the security Indicator lamp
alarm system.
Doing so could cause the security alarm to
malfunction.

The system preparation time extends from the

NOTE point at which all of the doors and the tailgate
To prevent damage or faulty operation.  The alarm system will not be activated if the are locked by pressing of the LOCK switch
• Do not hold the gas struts when closing the doors and the tailgate have been locked using on the key or the keyless operation function
tailgate. a key, the inside lock knob or the central to the point at which the system armed mode
door lock switch (instead of the keyless entry goes into effect.
• Also, do not push or pull the gas struts.
system or the keyless operation function). During this time, it is possible to temporarily
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts. open a door or the tailgate without using the
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts. keyless entry system or the keyless operation
• Do not hang any object on the gas struts. function and without causing the alarm to
sound (for example, when you forget some-
thing inside the vehicle or realize that a win-
dow is open).

Locking and unlocking 3-19

 Security alarm system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
System armed mode NOTE position and then remove the key (except
 The alarm will resume if unlawful actions
for vehicles equipped with the keyless
(The buzzer stops and the security indicator are taken again, even if the alarm has
operation system), or put the operation
stopped.
3 lamp continues to blink with the indicator’s
reduced lit-up duration time.)
mode in OFF (vehicles equipped with the
keyless operation system).
Once the system preparation mode has ended, 2. Exit the vehicle and close all of the doors
the system armed mode starts. System cancellation
and tailgate.
If an unlawful opening of any of the doors or 3. Press the LOCK switch (A) on the key of
tailgate is detected during the system armed It is possible to cancel the system activation the keyless entry system or the keyless
mode, the alarm will be activated to warn during the system preparation mode or the operation system, the driver’s or front
people around the vehicle of an abnormal system armed mode. passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (B),
condition. In addition, it is possible to cancel the alarm or the tailgate lock/unlock switch (C) in
Also, if unlawful moving of the vehicle is once it has been activated. order to lock all the doors and the tailgate.
attempted or a vehicle intrusion is detected, Refer to “Cancelling the system” on page
the alarm will be activated. 3-21, “Cancelling the alarm” on page 3-22. Keyless entry key Keyless operation key

Alarm activation NOTE

 When lending the vehicle to another person
Inside alarm (approximately 10 seconds): or allowing the vehicle to be driven by some-
one who is unfamiliar with the security alarm
The buzzer sounds, warning those inside system, be sure to give the person a proper
the vehicle of an abnormal condition. explanation of the security alarm system.
If a person who is unfamiliar with the secu-
Outside alarm (approximately 30 seconds): rity alarm system accidentally unlocked the
vehicle, causing the alarm to sound, the
The turn-signal lamps blink and the horn alarm would be a nuisance to people nearby.
sounds, warning people around the vehi-
cle of an abnormal condition.
Setting the system
Refer to “Alarm activation” on page 3-22. E00301702637

Follow the procedure below to set the system

to the system armed mode.
3-20 Locking and unlocking
 Security alarm system
Indicator lamp
Driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock NOTE
switch  The security alarm system can be activated
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the 3
NOTE system to the system armed mode while peo-
 The system preparation mode is not activated ple are riding in the vehicle.
when the doors and the tailgate have been  Avoid leaving valuable items inside the vehi-
locked using a method other than the keyless cle even when the security alarm system has
entry system or the keyless operation func- been set to the “active” mode.
tion (namely a key, the inside lock knob or
the central door lock switch).
 If the security indicator lamp in the instru-
Tailgate lock/unlock switch
ment cluster does not blink after the locking
Cancelling the system
E00301802478
operation using the keyless entry system or
the keyless operation function, the security The following methods can be used to cancel
alarm system may be malfunctioning. the system when it is in the system prepara-
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorised tion mode or the system armed mode.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
 Pressing the UNLOCK switch on the key.
 Turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
4. After approximately 20 seconds, the
position. (except for vehicles equipped
buzzer stops, and when the blinking of the
with the keyless operation system)
security indicator lamp starts to slow
By locking the vehicle using the keyless  Putting the operation mode in ON. (vehi-
down, the system armed mode goes into
entry system or the keyless operation cles equipped with the keyless operation
effect.
function, the system preparation mode is system)
The security indicator lamp continues to
activated.  Opening any one of the doors or the tail-
blink during the system armed mode.
The buzzer makes an intermittent beeping gate, or inserting the key into the ignition
sound and the security indicator lamp in switch (except for vehicles equipped with
the instrument cluster flashes for confir- the keyless operation system) when the
mation. system is in the system preparation mode.

Locking and unlocking 3-21

 Security alarm system
 Holding the keyless operation key and
pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s
NOTE
 If the UNLOCK switch on the key, the
door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate
driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch to unlock the doors
lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate
3 and the tailgate (vehicles equipped with lock/unlock switch is pressed and no door or
the keyless operation system). the tailgate is opened within 30 seconds, the
doors and the tailgate will automatically
relock. In this case as well, the system prepa-
NOTE ration mode will go into effect.
 If the battery terminals are disconnected
 The time between pressing of the UNLOCK
while the system is in the system preparation
switch on the key, the driver’s or front pas-
mode, the memory will be erased.
senger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tail- 3. The alarm will resume if unlawful actions
 It is possible to register up to four keys for
gate lock/unlock switch and automatic
keyless entry system and four keys for key- are taken again, even if the alarm has
locking can be adjusted. Please consult an
less operation system.
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
stopped.
As long as they are registered, any of the
keys, other than the one used to activate the
system, can be used to cancel the system. Alarm activation Cancelling the alarm
If you want to register additional keys, E00301902512
E00302001946

please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI It is possible to halt the activation of an alarm

MOTORS dealer.
When the system is in the system armed
mode, the alarm will be activated as follows using the following methods:
 The activation distance for keyless entry sys-
tem is approximately 4 m. if the vehicle is unlocked or if any of the
 Pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK switch
If it is not possible to lock or unlock the doors or tailgate is opened using a method
on the key.
vehicle by pressing the switch at the correct other than the keyless entry system or the
(After pressing of the LOCK switch, the
distance or the security alarm system cannot keyless operation function.
vehicle will lock if all the doors and the
be set or cancelled using the switch, the bat-
1. The inside alarm will be activated for tailgate are closed, after which the system
tery may need to be replaced.
Replace the battery at your authorised approximately 10 seconds. preparation mode will once again go into
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. 2. The alarm will be activated for approxi- effect.)
mately 30 seconds.  Turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
The turn-signal lamps will flash, and the position. (except for vehicles equipped
horn will sound intermittently. with the keyless operation system)

3-22 Locking and unlocking

 Electric window control
 Putting the operation mode in ON. (vehi-
Driver’s switches Driver’s switches
cles equipped with the keyless operation
system)
 Holding the keyless operation key and The driver’s switches can be used to operate
locking or unlocking the doors and the all door windows. A window can be opened
or closed by operating the corresponding
3
tailgate using the keyless operation func-
tion (vehicles equipped with the keyless switch.
operation system). Press the switch down to open the window,
and pull up the switch to close it.
NOTE If the switch for the driver’s window is fully
 When the ignition switch is turned to the
pressed down/pulled up, the door window
1- Driver’s door window automatically opens/closes completely.
“ON” position or the operation mode is put
in ON, the buzzer sounds four times. This 2- Front passenger’s door window If you want to stop the window movement,
operation indicates that the alarm was acti- 3- Rear left door window operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
vated while the vehicle was parked. 4- Rear right door window tion.
Please check the inside of the vehicle to con- 5- Lock switch
firm that nothing was stolen.
Passenger’s switches
 Even if the battery is disconnected, the alarm
activation memory will not be erased. WARNING
 Before operating the electric window con- The passenger’s switches can be used to oper-
trol, make sure that nothing is capable of ate the corresponding passenger’s door win-
dows.
Electric window control being trapped (head, hand, finger, etc.).
Press the switch down for opening the win-
 Never leave the vehicle without removing
E00302201850
the key. dow, and pull up the switch for closing.
The electric windows can only be operated  Never leave a child (or other person who
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position might not be capable of safe operation of
or the operation mode in ON. the electric window control) in the vehicle
alone.
Electric window control switch
E00302303695

Each door window opens or closes while the

corresponding switch is operated.

Locking and unlocking 3-23

 Electric window control

Safety mechanism (driver’s

window only)
E00302502339

3 When the door window is automatically

closed by pulling up the switch fully, if a
hand or head is trapped in the closing win-
dow, it will lower automatically.
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts
their head or hand out of the window when
closing the driver’s door window.
1- Lock
The lowered window will become operational
NOTE 2- Unlock
after a few seconds.
 Repeated operation with the engine stopped
will run down the battery. Operate the win-
dow switches only while the engine is run- WARNING WARNING
ning.  A child may tamper with the switch at the  If the battery terminals are disconnected
 The rear door windows only open halfway. risk of its hands or head being trapped in or the fuse for electric window is replaced,
the window. When driving with a child in the safety mechanism will be cancelled.
the vehicle, please push the window lock If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
switch to disable the passenger’s switches. injury could result.
Lock switch
E00303102749

When this switch is operated, the passenger’s CAUTION

switches cannot be used to open or close the
Timer function
E00302402266  The safety mechanism is cancelled just
door windows and the driver’s switch cannot before the window is fully closed. This
open or close any door windows other than The door windows can be opened or closed allows the window to close completely.
the driver’s door window. for 30 seconds after the engine is stopped. Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
To unlock, push it once again. However, once the driver’s door or the front gers are trapped in the window.
passenger’s door is opened, the windows can-  The safety mechanism is deactivated while
not be operated. the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-
cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
the door window opening.

3-24 Locking and unlocking

 Electric window control

NOTE
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
cause the driver’s door window to be sub-
jected to a physical shock similar to that 3
caused by a trapped hand or head.
 If the safety mechanism is activated five or
more times in a row, the safety mechanism
will be cancelled and the door window will
not close correctly.
In such a case, the following procedure
should be implemented to rectify this situa-
tion. If the window is open, repeatedly raise
the driver’s door window switch until that
window has been fully closed. Following
this, release the switch, raise the switch once
again and hold it in this condition for at least
1 second, then release it. You should now be
able to operate in the normal fashion.
 If the battery terminals are disconnected or
the fuse for electric window is replaced, the
safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
door window will not automatically
open/close completely.
If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
driver’s door window switch until the win-
dow has been fully closed. Following this,
release the switch, raise the switch once
again and hold it in this condition for at least
1 second, then release it. You should now be
able to operate the driver’s door window in
the normal fashion.

Locking and unlocking 3-25

Seat and seat belts

Seat arrangement .............................................................................4-2 4

Seat adjustment ................................................................................4-4
Front seats ........................................................................................4-4
Second seats .....................................................................................4-5
Third seats ........................................................................................4-7
Head restraints .................................................................................4-7
Making a luggage area .....................................................................4-9
Seat belts ........................................................................................4-10
Pregnant women restraint ..............................................................4-14
Seat belt pre-tensioner system .......................................................4-15
Child restraint ................................................................................4-15
Seat belt inspection ........................................................................4-22
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag ...............................4-23
 Seat arrangement

Seat arrangement
E00400202085

By operating the front, second or third seat, select the desired seat arrangement.

4
Normal usage

4-2 Seat and seat belts

 Seat arrangement

Folding the second seat

armrest and third seats
 P. 4-9
4

Folding the second and

Making a luggage area third seats
 P. 4-9

Folding the third seats

 P. 4-10

Seat and seat belts 4-3

 Seat adjustment

Seat adjustment WARNING CAUTION

E00400302233  To minimize the risk of personal injury in  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
the event of a collision or sudden braking, pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are com-
the seatbacks should always be in the gers.
fortable and that you can reach the pedals, almost upright position while the vehicle is
steering wheel, switches etc. while retaining a in motion. The protection provided by the
4 clear field of vision. seat belts may be reduced significantly Front seats
when the seatback is reclined. There is E00400401673

WARNING greater risk that the passenger will slide

under the seat belt, resulting in serious
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
injury, when the seatback is reclined.
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
 Do not place objects under the seats. This
trol and result in an accident. After
could prevent the seat from locking
adjustments are made, ensure the seating
securely, and it could lead to an accident.
is locked in position by attempting to
It may also cause damage to the seat or
move the seat forward and rearward with-
other parts.
out using the adjusting mechanism.
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in the
luggage area of a vehicle. Also, the luggage
area and rear seats should never be used CAUTION
as a play area by children. In a collision,  Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or 1- To adjust forward or backward
people or children riding unrestrained in with adult supervision for correct and safe Lift the handle and adjust the seat to
these areas are more likely to be seriously operation. the desired position, and release the
injured or killed.  Do not place a cushion or the like between handle.
 Do not allow people or children to ride in your back and the seatback while driving.
2- To recline the seatback
any area of your vehicle that is not The effectiveness of the head restraints will
be reduced in the event of an accident.
Pull the lever up and then lean back-
equipped with seats and seat belts, and
 The reclining mechanism of the front seat’s
ward to the desired position, and
make sure that everyone travelling in your
vehicle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, seatback is spring loaded, causing it to return release the lever.
or in the case of a child is strapped in a to the vertical position when the lock lever is 3- To adjust seat height (driver’s side
child restraint. operated. When using the lever, sit close to only)
the seatback or hold it with your hand to con- Turn the dial and adjust the seat cush-
trol its return motion. ion height to the desired position.
 When sliding the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or foot.

4-4 Seat and seat belts

 Second seats
Refer to “Second and third seat belt stor-
Second seats age” on page 4-14.
E00402001631
3. Lower the head restraints of the second
seat to the lowest position.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
4. If the second seat is in the forward-most
position, move it rearward. 4
NOTE
 If the second seats are in a forward position,
you may not be able to fold them.

CAUTION 5. Pull the lever (A) forward, then tilt the

 Do not climb or sit on the armrest.
1- To adjust forward or backward seatback forward.
Doing so could damage the armrest.
Lift the handle and adjust the seat to the When the seatback is tilted forward, the
desired position, and release the han- floor lock will be released and the rear of
dle. the seat will lift up slightly.
2- To recline the seatback To get in and out of the third
Pull the lever forward and adjust the seat
seatback by hand to the desired posi- E00412601076

tion, and release the lever. Getting in and out of the third seat can be
made easily by folding the second seat.

Armrest To fold
E00402401648

To use the armrest, pull forward the strap to 1. Adjust the angle of the front seatbacks in
release the lock, and fold the armrest down. the upright position and move the front
To return to the original position, push it seat forward. (Refer to “Front seats” on
backward until it is flush with the seat. page 4-4.) 6. Lift the whole seat forward.
2. Store the seat belt buckles in the storage
pockets of the second seats.

Seat and seat belts 4-5

 Second seats
2. Push the seat until you hear a “click” and
To return
the seat locks securely to the floor.
1. While supporting the seat by hand, gently
lower the seat.

CAUTION
 Do not drive the vehicle while a second seat
3. Raise the seatback until it locks securely
is folded. Because the folded second seat is
into place.
not locked, it could move in the event of hard
braking, a collision, or similar situation, Push lightly on the seatback to confirm
striking the occupant of the other second seat
CAUTION that it has actually been secured.
and trapping the feet of the third seat occu-  When returning the second seat while there
pants, resulting in injuries. is an occupant in the other second seat or
occupants in the third seat, be careful not to
strike the second seat occupant or trap the
feet of the third seat occupants with the sec-
ond seat.

4-6 Seat and seat belts

 Third seats
in the direction of the arrow. After adjust-
Third seats Head restraints ment, push the head restraint downward and
E00402701540 E00403303013
make sure that it is locked.
WARNING WARNING
 For reasons of safety, whenever passen-  Driving without the head restraints in
gers sit in the third seat, be sure to raise
all the head restraints of the second seats.
place can cause you and your passengers
serious injury or death in an accident. To
4
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
always make sure the head restraints are
installed and properly positioned when
the seat is occupied.
 Never place a cushion or similar device on
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
Second or third seats
To recline the seatback.
Pull up the strap and adjust the seatback by To adjust height To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
hand to the desired position, and release the pull up the head restraint to the locked posi-
strap. tion.
Front seats
To raise the head restraint, move it upward.
Adjust the head restraint height so that the To lower the restraint, move it downward
centre of the head restraint is as close as pos- while pushing the height adjusting knob (A)
sible to ear level to reduce the chances of in the direction of the arrow. After adjust-
injury in the event of collision. Any person ment, push the head restraint downward and
too tall for the head restraint to reach their make sure that it is locked.
seated ear level, should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.

To raise the head restraint, move it upward.

To lower the restraint, move it downward
while pushing the height adjusting knob (A)
Seat and seat belts 4-7
 Head restraints

To remove (front or second CAUTION

seats)  Confirm that the height adjusting knob (A) is
correctly adjusted as shown in the illustra-
tion, and also lift the head restraints to
Lift the head restraint with the height adjust- ensure that they do not come out of the seat-
ing knob (A) pressed in. back.
4
To install (front or second seats)

Confirm that the head restraint is facing the

correct direction, and then insert it into the
WARNING seatback while pressing the height adjusting
knob (A) in the direction indicated by the
 When a person sits in the second or the
third seats, pull up the head restraint to a
arrow.
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
height at which it locks in position. Be The head restraint stalk with the adjustment
fers according to the seat. Always use the
sure to make this adjustment before start- notches (B) must be installed in the hole with correct head restraint provided for the seat
ing to drive. Serious injuries could other- the adjusting knob (A). and do not install the head restraint in the
wise be suffered in the result of an impact. wrong direction.

NOTE
 The head restraints of the third seats cannot
be removed.

4-8 Seat and seat belts

 Making a luggage area
Refer to “Folding the third seats” on page
Making a luggage area Folding the second seat armrest 4-10.
E00403401557 and third seats 2. Store the seat belt buckles in the storage
To create luggage space, you can fold the sec- E00465100038 pockets of the second seats.
ond and/or the third seats. Long items can be loaded while passengers Refer to “Second and third seat belt stor-
are sitting in the second row outboard seats. age” on page 4-14.
WARNING 3. Lower the head restraints of the second 4
 After tilting the seatback of a second seat seat to the lowest position.
forward, push down on the rear of the seat Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
and make sure it is securely locked to the 4. Move the second seats to the rear-most
floor. The seat could move if it is not position.
retained, causing a serious accident. 5. Pull the lever (A) forward, then tilt the
seatback forward.
When the seatback is tilted forward, the
CAUTION floor lock will be released and the rear of
 Do not stack luggage above the seatback the seat will lift up slightly.
height or load luggage in such a way that
will interfere with the operation of the vehi-
cle. Secure the luggage firmly. 1. Fold the third seats.
Serious accidents could result due to unre-
Refer to “Folding the third seats” on page
strained objects entering the passenger com-
4-10.
partment during sudden braking.
2. Fold the armrest down.
 When folding or storing the seat, be sure not
to catch your hand or leg. Refer to “Armrest” on page 4-5.

Folding the second and third

NOTE seats
 It is possible to folding the seat indepen- E00403501747
dently on each side. 6. Push the seat until you hear a “click” and
the seat locks securely to the floor.
To fold
1. Fold the third seats.

Seat and seat belts 4-9

 Seat belts

Folding the third seats

E00403601142

To fold

4 1. Lower the head restraints of the third seat

to the lowest position. (Refer to “Head
restraints” on page 4-7.)
2. Pull up the strap (A), then fold the seat-
back forward.

To return Seat belts

E00404802164

Raise the seatback until it locks securely into To protect you and your passengers in the
place. event of an accident, it is the most important
Push lightly on the seatback to confirm that it that the seat belts be worn correctly while
has actually been secured. driving.
The front seat belts have a pre-tensioner sys-
tem. These belts are used the same way as a
conventional seat belt.
Refer to “Seat belt pre-tensioner system” on
To return page 4-15.

Pull the strap (B), then raise the seatback until WARNING
it locks securely into place.  Seat belts should always be worn by every
Push lightly on the seatback to confirm that it adult who drives or rides in this vehicle,
has actually been secured. and by all children who are large enough
to wear seat belts properly.
Other children should always use proper
child restraint systems.

4-10 Seat and seat belts

 Seat belts
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until
WARNING 3-point type seat belt (with a “click” is heard.
 Always place the shoulder belt over your emergency locking mechanism)
shoulder and across your chest. Never put E00404903234
it behind you or under your arm.
 One seat belt should be used by only one This type of belt requires no length adjust-
ment. Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the
person. Doing otherwise can be danger-
ous. movement of wearer, but in the event of a 4
 The seat belt will provide its wearer with sudden or strong shock, the belt automatically
maximum protection if the recliner seat- locks to hold the wearer’s body.
back is placed in fully upright position.
When the seatback is reclined, there is
greater risk that the passenger will slide
NOTE
under the belt, especially in a forward  You can check if the belt locks by pulling it
impact accident, and may be injured by forward quickly.
the belt or by striking the instrument WARNING
panel or seatbacks.  Never wear the lap portion of the belt
 Remove any twists when using the belt. To fasten across your abdomen. During accidents it
 No modifications or additions should be can press sharply against abdomen and
made by the user which will either prevent 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding increase the risk of injury.
the seat belt adjusting devices from oper- the latch plate.  The seat belts must not be twisted when
ating to remove slack, or prevent the seat worn.
belt assembly from being adjusted to NOTE
remove slack.  When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a
 Never hold a child in your arms or on
3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as
locked condition, pull the belts once force-
your lap when riding in this vehicle, even desired.
fully and then return them. After that, pull
if you are wearing your seat belt. To do so the belts out slowly once again.
risks severe or fatal injury to your child in
a collision or sudden stop.
 Always adjust the belt to a snug fit.
 Always wear the lap portion of the belt
over your hips.

Seat and seat belts 4-11

 Seat belts
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
To unfasten NOTE position or the operation mode is put in ON
 If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,
Hold the latch plate and push the button on while the seat belt is not fastened, the warn-
the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat
the buckle. ing lamp comes on and the tone sounds for
belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
mild soap or detergent solution. approximately 6 seconds to remind the driver
and the front passenger to fasten the seat belt.
4 If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still
unfastened, the warning lamp will blink and
the tone will sound intermittently until the
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, “FAS-
TEN SEAT BELT” is displayed on the infor-
mation screen in the multi-information
display (Type 1 only).

WARNING
Seat belt reminder  Do not install any accessory or sticker that
E00409802534
makes the lamp difficult to see.
NOTE
 As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold- Type 1
ing the latch plate while retracting so that the
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could NOTE
damage the vehicle.  If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-
tened, the warning lamp and the tone will
issue further warnings each time the vehicle
starts moving from a stop.
Type 2  For the front passenger seat, the warning
function works only while a person is sitting
on the seat.
 When luggage is placed on the front passen-
ger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may,
depending on the weight and position of the
luggage, cause the warning tone to sound
and the warning lamp to come on.

4-12 Seat and seat belts

 Seat belts
3. Insert the latch plate (B) into the buckle 2. To release the buckle (C), press the button
Second-centre 3-point type seat (D). (E) with a narrow-tipped object (latch
belt plate (B), mechanical key, etc.).
E00405201298

The second-centre 3-point type seat belt must

be worn correctly as illustrated.
4

4. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as

desired.
CAUTION
 As the belt retracts automatically, keep the
To unfasten latch plate held while retracting so that the
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could
WARNING 1. Hold the latch plate (B) and push the but- cause personal injury or damage to the vehi-
 Be sure to securely connect the both latch ton on the buckle (D). cle.
plate (A and B). Failing to do so could sig-
nificantly reduce the amount of protection 3. After the seat belt is retracted completely,
and cause serious injures in a collision or a insert the latch plate (B) into the upper slit
sudden stop.
(F), and then insert the small latch plate
(A) into the lower slit (G).

To fasten
1. Pull out the buckle (C) from the seat cush-
ion.
2. Pull the seat belt and insert the small latch
plate (A) into the buckle (C).

Seat and seat belts 4-13

 Pregnant women restraint

Second seat

4
Third seat

4. Store the seat belt buckle in the storage

pocket. Second-centre seating position
Refer to “Second and third seat belt stor-
Refer to “Second-centre 3-point type seat
age” on page 4-14.
belt” on page 4-13.

Second and third seat belt stor- Pregnant women restraint

Seat belt buckle storage
age E00405601250

E00405301710
Store the seat belt buckles in the storage WARNING
pockets.  Seat belts work for everyone, including
Seat belt plate storage pregnant women. Pregnant women should
use the available seat belts. This will
reduce the likelihood of injury to both the
Outboard seating position woman and the unborn child. The lap belt
should be worn across the thighs and as
Pass the belt through the notch (A).
snug against the hips as possible, but not
across the waist. Consult your doctor if
you have any additional questions or con-
cerns.

4-14 Seat and seat belts

 Seat belt pre-tensioner system

Seat belt pre-tensioner sys- CAUTION Child restraint

tem  Installation of audio equipment or repairs in
the vicinity of the pre-tensioner seat belts or
E00406404038

E00405701639 When transporting children in your vehicle,

floor console must be performed in line with
The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines. It is
some type of child restraint system should
each have a seat belt equipped with a pre-ten- important to do so because the work could always be used according to the size of the
sioner system. affect the pre-tensioner systems. child. This is required by law in most coun- 4
 If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con- tries.
sult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS The regulations concerning driving with chil-
Pre-tensioner system dealer. dren in the front seat may differ from country
E00405802565 It is important to do so because unexpected to country. You are advised to comply with
When the ignition switch or the operation activation of the pre-tensioner seat belts the relevant regulations.
mode is under the following conditions, if could cause injuries.
there is a frontal impact severe enough to WARNING
injure the driver and/or front passenger, the  When possible, put children in the rear
pre-tensioner system will retract their respec- NOTE
seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil-
tive seat belts instantaneously, thus maximiz-  The pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated
dren of all sizes and ages are safer when
ing the seat belt’s effectiveness. if the vehicle suffers a severe impact, even if
properly restrained in the rear seat rather
the seat belts are not worn.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the key- than in the front seat.
 The pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to
less operation system]  Holding a child in your arms is no substi-
work only once. After the pre-tensioner seat
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or tute for a restraint system. Failure to use a
belts have been activated, we recommend
“START” position. proper restraint system can result in
you have it replaced by an authorised
[Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation severe or fatal injury to your child.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
system]  Each child restraint device or fixing is to
be used only by one child.
The operation mode is in ON.
 When attaching a child restraint system to
SRS warning the second seat, prevent the front seat-
WARNING E00405901442 backs from touching the child’s feet and
 To obtain the best results from your pre- The same warning lamp/display is shared by child restraint system.
tensioner seat belt, make sure you have Otherwise, the child could be seriously
the SRS airbags and the pre-tensioner seat
adjusted your seat correctly and wear injured in the event of hard braking or a
belts.
your seat belt properly. collision.
Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on
page 4-27.

Seat and seat belts 4-15

 Child restraint

Caution for installing the child WARNING

restraint on vehicle with front A REARWARD FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT must NOT be used in the
passenger’s airbag front passenger seat as it places an infant
too close to the passenger’s airbag. The
force of an inflating airbag could kill or
4 The label shown here is attached on vehicles
with front passenger’s airbag. cause serious injuries to the child. A rear-
ward facing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.

Instruction:
 For small infants, an infant carrier should
be used. For small children whose height
when seated allows the shoulder belt to lie
A FORWARD FACING CHILD in contact with the face or the throat, a
RESTRAINT should be used in the rear child seat should be used.
seat whenever possible; if used in the front
 The child restraint system should be
WARNING seat, adjust the seat to the most rearward
appropriate for your child’s weight and
 Extreme Hazard! position.
height and properly fit the vehicle. For a
NEVER use a rearward facing child
higher degree of safety: THE CHILD
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
Infants and small children RESTRAINT SYSTEM SHOULD BE
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
E00406602401 INSTALLED IN THE REAR SEAT.
occur. When transporting infants and small children  Before purchasing a child restraint sys-
in your vehicle, follow the instruction given tem, try installing it in the rear seat to
below. make sure there is a good fit. Because of
the location of the seat belt buckles and
the shape of the seat cushion, it may be
difficult to securely install some manufac-
turer’s child restraint systems.

4-16 Seat and seat belts

 Child restraint
If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
NOTE
• Using the lower anchorage in the second
cushion after the seat belt has been tight-
seat ONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIX
ened, choose another manufacturer’s child
mountings.
restraint system. Refer to “Installing a child restraint system
to the lower anchorage (ISOFIX child
WARNING restraint mountings) and tether anchorage” 4
on page 4-19.
 When installing a child restraint system,
• Using the seat belt.
refer to the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the restraint system. Refer to “Installing a child restraint system
Failure to do so can result in severe or to a 3-point type seat belt (with emergency
locking mechanism)” on page 4-21.
fatal injury to your child.
 After installation, push and pull the child
restraint system back and forth, and side Older children
to side, to see that it is positively secured. E00406701450
If the child restraint system is not installed
securely, it may cause injury to the child Children who have outgrown the child
or other occupants in the case of accident restraint system should be seated in the rear
or sudden stops. seat and wear combination lap shoulder belt.
 When the child restraint system is not in The lap portion of the belt should be snug and
use, keep your child restraint system positioned low on the abdomen so that it is
secured with the seat belt or remove it below the top of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the
from the vehicle in order to prevent it belt could intrude into the child’s abdomen
from being thrown around inside the vehi- during an accident and cause injury.
cle during an accident.

NOTE
 Depending on the seating position in the
vehicle and the child restraint system that
you have, the child restraint can be attached
using one of the following two ways:

Seat and seat belts 4-17

 Child restraint

Selecting the child restraint system for each seating position

E00406803703

Suitable for “universal” category child restraint systems

4
Suitable for i-Size and ISOFIX child restraint systems

Suitable for front-facing child restraint systems only

Rear-facing child restraint systems must not be installed

Not suitable for a child restraint system

This seat is equipped with a top tether anchor

*1: When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint
from the seat and move the seat to the rearmost position. However,
do not remove the head restraint when installing a booster cushion
(see page 4-19, 4-21).
*2: When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger
seat, adjust the seatback angle to 5 steps rearward from the most
upright position.
*3: When installing a child restraint system on a second row outboard
seat, adjust the seatback angle to 2 steps rearward from the most
upright position.

4-18 Seat and seat belts

 Child restraint

CAUTION
 When installing a child restraint system on a second seat, slide the seat in front of the child restraint system forward or adjust its seatback so that the child’s
feet and the child restraint system do not contact the seat.

Seating Position
4
Category
Front pas- Second row Second row Second row Third row Third row
senger (left) (centre) (right) (left) (right)
Seat compatible with a “universal” category child restraint Yes (front-
Yes No Yes No No
system that is secured using the vehicle’s seat belts facing only)
Seat compatible with i-Size and ISOFIX child restraint
No Yes No Yes No No
systems
Seat compatible with a side-facing child restraint system
No No No No No No
(L1/L2)
Maximum allowable size for a rear-facing child restraint
No R3 No R3 No No
system (R1/R2X/R2/R3)
Maximum allowable size for a front-facing child restraint
No F3 No F3 No No
system (F1/F2X/F2/F3)

Your vehicle’s second seat is fitted with lower

Installing a child restraint sys- anchorages for attaching a child restraint sys-
tem to the lower anchorage tem with ISOFIX mountings.
(ISOFIX child restraint mount-
ings) and tether anchorage
E00406902358

Lower anchorage location

Seat and seat belts 4-19

 Child restraint
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
Tether anchorage location Child restraint system with ISO-
FIX mountings CAUTION
There are two child restraint anchorage points  Do not remove the head restraint when
located on the back of the second seatbacks. The child restraint system is designed only installing a booster cushion.
These are for securing a child restraint system for seats that incorporate lower anchorages.
4 tether strap to each of the two rear seating Retain the child restraint system using the
positions in your vehicle. lower anchorages.
It is not necessary to retain the child restraint
system using the vehicle’s seatbelts.

3. When installing a child restraint system,

slide the seat to its most rearward posi-
tion.
4. Open the gap a little with your hand to
expose the lower anchorages (A).
5. Push the child restraint system’s connec-
WARNING tors (B) into the lower anchorages (A) in
A: Child restraint system connectors accordance with the instructions provided
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by by the child restraint system’s manufac-
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no turer.
circumstances are they to be used for To install
adult seatbelts, harnesses or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle. 1. Remove any foreign material in or around
the connectors and ensure the vehicle seat
belt is in its normal storage position.
2. Remove the head restraint from the loca-
tion in which you wish to install a child
restraint system.

4-20 Seat and seat belts

 Child restraint

Installing a child restraint sys-

tem to a 3-point type seat belt
(with emergency locking mech-
anism)
E00408702015
4
To install
1. Put a child restraint system on the seat in
A: Lower anchorage which you wish to install it, and remove
B: Connector the head restraint from the seat.
7. Push and pull the child restraint system in Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
all directions to be sure it is secure.
If your child restraint system has a support CAUTION
leg, make sure that there is a support leg at To remove  Do not remove the head restraint when
the stable position on the floor. installing a booster cushion.
If your child restraint system requires the use
Remove the child restraint system in accord-
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in
ance with the instructions provided by the
accordance with step 6.
child restraint system’s manufacturer.
6. Latch the tether strap hook (C) of the
child restraint system to the tether anchor
bar (D) and tighten the top tether strap
hook so it is securely fastened.

2. When installing a child restraint system,

adjust seat slide to its most rearward posi-
tion.

Seat and seat belts 4-21

 Seat belt inspection
3. Route the belt through the child restraint 5. Before putting the child in the restraint,
according to the child restraint system push and pull the restraint in all directions
WARNING
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any
manufacturer’s instructions, then insert to be sure it is secure. Do this before each
part of the seat belt assemblies; we recom-
the latch plate into the buckle. use.
mend you to have this work done by an
4. Remove all slack of a lap belt by pulling authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
the webbing through the belt’s adjustment To remove dealer. Incorrect repair or replacement
4 feature. could reduce the effectiveness of the belts
3-point type seat belt requires no length and could result in serious injury in the
Remove the plate from the buckle, then
adjustment, remove all slack by using the event of a collision.
remove the seat belt from the child restraint
locking clip.  Once the pre-tensioner has activated, it
system. cannot be re-used.
WARNING It must be replaced together with the
retractor.
 For some types of child restraint, the lock- Seat belt inspection  Do not insert any foreign objects (pieces of
ing clip (A) should be used to help avoid E00406302017
personal injury during a collision or sud- plastic, paper clips, buttons, etc.) in the
den manoeuvre. Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed web- buckle or retractor mechanism. In addi-
It must be fitted and used in accordance bing and for cracked or deformed metallic tion, do not modify, remove, or install
with the child restraint manufacturer’s parts. Replace the belt assembly if defective. the seat belt. Otherwise, the seat belt may
instructions. not be able to provide adequate protection
The locking clip must be removed when in a collision or other situation.
WARNING
the child restraint is removed.
 We recommend you to have all seat belt
assemblies including retractors and
attaching hardware inspected after any
collision. We recommend that seat belt
assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was minor
and the belts show no damage and con-
tinue to operate properly.
 A dirty belt should be cleaned with neu-
tral detergent in warm water. After rins-
ing in water, let it dry in the shade. Do not
attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts
because this affects their characteristics.

4-22 Seat and seat belts

 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag
windows after airbag deployment, if safe to
Supplemental restraint sys- do so.
tem (SRS) - airbag The airbags deflate very rapidly after deploy-
E00407203690 ment, so there is little danger of obscured
The information written in this supplemental vision.
restraint system (SRS) section contains
important points concerning the driver’s and CAUTION 4
front passenger’s airbags.  Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid speed.
The SRS airbags are designed to supplement In certain situations, contact with inflating
the primary protection of the driver and front airbags can result in abrasions, light cuts,
passenger side seat belt systems by providing bruises, and the like.
1- Airbag module (Driver)
those occupants with protection against head 2- Airbag module (Passenger)
and chest injuries in certain moderate-to-
severe frontal collisions. WARNING
Only when the ignition switch or the opera-  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat tion mode is under the following conditions, ERLY SEATED.
belts; for maximum protection in all types of the airbags will operate. A driver or front passenger too close to
crashes and accidents, seat belts should [Except for vehicles equipped with the key- the steering wheel or instrument panel
ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or less operation system] during airbag deployment can be killed or
rides in this vehicle. The ignition switch is in the “ON” or seriously injured.
“START” position. Airbags inflate very fast, and with great
force.
[Vehicles equipped with the keyless operation
How the supplemental restraint system]
If the driver and front passenger are not
properly seated and restrained, the air-
system works The operation mode is in ON. bags may not protect you properly, and
E00407303721
could cause serious or fatal injuries when
The SRS includes the following components: The airbags deployment produces a sudden, it inflates.
loud noise, and releases some smoke and  Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
powder, but these conditions are not injuri- head or chest close to the steering wheel or
ous, and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. instrument panel. Do not put feet or legs
People with respiratory problems may feel on or against the instrument panel.
some temporary irritation from chemicals
used to produce the deployment; open the

Seat and seat belts 4-23

 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag

WARNING WARNING Driver’s and passenger’s front

 Place all infants and small children in the  Older children should be seated in the airbag system
rear seat and properly restrained using an rear seat, properly wearing the seat belt, E00407402161
appropriate child restraint system. with an appropriate booster seat if
The rear seat is the safest for infants and needed. The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
children. ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
4 The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
Caution for installing the child the instrument panel above the glove box.
restraint on vehicle with front The front passenger’s airbag deploys at the
passenger’s airbag same time as the driver’s airbag, even if the
E00408802638
passenger seat is not occupied.
The label shown here is attached on vehicles
with front passenger’s airbag.

 Infants and small children should never

be unrestrained, stand up against the
instrument panel or held in your arms or
on your lap. They could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision, including
when the airbag inflates. They should be
properly seated in the rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint system. See the
“Child restraint” section of this owner’s
manual.

WARNING
 Extreme Hazard!
NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.

4-24 Seat and seat belts

 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag
25 km/h collision when impacting straight harm. (The vehicle body’s front area may
Deployment of front airbags into a solid wall that does not move or deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.)
E00412501453
deform. If the severity of the impact is below Under such circumstances, the front airbags
the above threshold level, the front airbags may not deploy irrespective of the deforma-
The front airbags ARE may not deploy. However, this threshold tion and damage to the vehicle body.
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when… speed will be considerably higher if the vehi- Examples of some typical conditions are
cle strikes an object that absorbs the impact shown in the illustration. 4
The front airbags are designed to deploy by either deforming or moving (for example,
when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe another stationary vehicle, pole or a guard
frontal impact. A typical condition is shown rail).
in the illustration. Because frontal collisions can easily move
you out of position, it is important to always
properly wear your seat belts. Your seat belts
will help keep you in a safe distance from the
steering wheel and instrument panel during
the initial stages of airbag deployment. The
initial stage of airbag inflation is the most
forceful, and can possibly cause serious or
fatal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your 1- Collision with a utility pole, tree or
vehicle are your primary means of protection other narrow objects
in a collision. The SRS airbags are designed 2- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a
to provide additional protection. Therefore, truck
for your safety and the safety of all occu- 3- Oblique frontal impacts
1- Head-on collision with a solid wall at
pants, be sure to always properly wear your
speed of approximately 25 km/h or
seat belts.
higher Because the front airbags do not protect the
2- Moderate to severe frontal impact occupant in all types of frontal collisions, be
within the shaded area between the The front airbags MAY NOT sure to always properly wear your seat belts.
arrows DEPLOY when…

The front airbags will deploy if the severity With certain types of frontal collisions, the
of impact is above the designed threshold vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb
level, comparable to an approximately the shock to help protect the occupants from
Seat and seat belts 4-25
 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag
keep you in a safe distance from the steering
The front airbags ARE NOT The front airbags MAY DEPLOY
wheel and instrument panel during the initial
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when… when… stages of airbag deployment. The initial stage
of airbag inflation is the most forceful and
The front airbags are not designed to deploy The front airbags may deploy if the bottom of can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries if
in conditions where they cannot typically pro- the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe you contact it at this stage.
4 vide protection to the occupant. impact (undercarriage damage).
Such conditions are shown in the illustration. Examples of some typical conditions are
shown in the illustration.
WARNING
 Do not attach anything to the steering
wheel padded cover, such as trim material,
badges, etc. It might strike and injure an
occupant if the airbag inflates.
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove
box. It might strike and injure an occu-
pant if the airbag inflates.

1- Rear end collisions

2- Side collisions 1- Collision with an elevated
3- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof median/island or kerb
2- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pot-
hole
Because the front airbags do not protect the  Do not attach accessories to, or put them
3- Vehicle drives down a steep slope and
occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to in front of, the windscreen. These objects
hits the ground
always properly wear your seat belts. could restrict the airbag inflation, or
strike and injure an occupant if the air-
Because the front airbags may deploy in cer- bags inflate.
tain types of unexpected impacts as shown in
the illustration that can easily move you out
of position, it is important to always properly
wear your seat belts. Your seat belts will help

4-26 Seat and seat belts

 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag
The SRS warning lamp/display is shared by
WARNING SRS warning lamp/display* the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
 Do not put packages, pets or other objects E00407803234
system.
between the airbags and the driver or
front passenger. It could affect airbag per- Type 1
formance, or could cause injury when the WARNING
airbag inflates.
 Right after the airbag inflation, several
 If any of the following conditions occur,
there may be a problem with the SRS air-
4
airbag system components will be hot. Do bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
not touch them; you could be burned. they may not function properly in a colli-
 The airbag system is designed to work sion or may suddenly activate without a
only once. Once the airbags have Type 2 collision:
deployed, they will not work again. They • Even when the ignition switch or the
must promptly be replaced and the entire operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
airbag system must be inspected by an ing lamp does not come on or it remains
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS on.
dealer. • The SRS warning lamp and/or the warn-
ing display comes on while driving.
The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
There is a supplemental restraint system sioners are designed to help reduce the
(“SRS”) warning lamp on the instrument risk of serious injury or death in certain
panel. The system checks itself every time the collisions.
If either of the above conditions occurs,
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
immediately have your vehicle checked by
or the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
warning lamp will come on for several sec- dealer.
onds and then go out. This in normal and
means the system is working properly.
If there is a problem involving one or more of
the SRS components, the warning lamp will
come on and stay on.
At the same time, the warning display will
appear on the information screen in the multi-
information display (Type 1 only).

Seat and seat belts 4-27

 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag

SRS servicing WARNING

E00407902951  If you found any tear scratch, crack or
damage to the portion of the airbags, you
WARNING should have the SRS inspected by an
 Any maintenance performed on or near authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.
4 the components of the SRS must be per-
formed only by an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. Do not
permit anyone else to do service, inspec- NOTE
tion, maintenance or repair on any SRS  If your vehicle has to be scrapped, do this in
components or wiring; similarly, no part line with local legislation and contact an
of the SRS should ever be handled or dis- authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
posed of by anyone except an authorised to safely dismantle the airbag system.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Improper work on the SRS components or
wiring could result in inadvertent deploy-
ment of the airbags, or could render the
SRS inoperative; either situation could
result in serious injury.
 Do not modify your steering wheel, seat
belt retractor or any other SRS compo-
nents. For example, replacement of the
steering wheel, or modifications to the
front bumper or body structure can
adversely affect SRS performance and
lead to possible injury.
 If your vehicle has received any damage,
you should have the SRS inspected by an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer to ensure it is in proper working
order.

4-28 Seat and seat belts

Instruments and controls

Instruments ......................................................................................5-2
Multi-information display - Type 1 .................................................5-3
Multi-information display - Type 2 ...............................................5-16 5
Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information
screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1) ............5-23
Indicator and warning lamps
(multi-information display - Type 2) .........................................5-33
Indicator lamps ..............................................................................5-33
Warning lamps ...............................................................................5-34
Information screen display (vehicle equipped
with the multi-information display - Type 1) ............................5-36
Combination headlamps and dipper switch ...................................5-38
Turn-signal lever ............................................................................5-40
Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-41
Front fog lamp switch*...................................................................5-41
Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-42
Rear window demister switch ........................................................5-44
Horn switch ....................................................................................5-45
 Instruments
2- Multi-information display (Type 1: TFT
Instruments colour LCD)  P.5-3
Meter illumination control -
E00500103255
Information screen display (Type 1)  Type 1
Type 1 P.5-24 E00531301288

Multi-information display (Type 2: Each time you press the rheostat illumination
mono-tone LCD)  P.5-16 button, there is a sound and the brightness of
3- Speedometer (km/h) the instruments changes.
4- Rheostat illumination button (Type 1)
5  P.5-2
5- Multi-information display switch (Type
2)  P.5-17

CAUTION
Type 2  When driving, watch the tachometer to make
sure that the engine speed indication does
not rise into the red zone (excessive engine
r/min).

1- Brightness level
2- Rheostat illumination button

NOTE
 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
1- Tachometer tively for when the position lamps are illumi-
The tachometer indicates the engine nated and when they are not.
speed (r/min). The tachometer can help  The brightness level of the instruments is
you obtain more economical driving stored when the operation mode is put in
and also warns you of excessive engine OFF.
speeds (Red zone).

5-2 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 1
[When the operation mode is OFF] [When the operation mode is ON]
NOTE
 If you press and hold the button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds or more when the position
lamps are illuminated, the brightness level
changes to the maximum level. Pressing and
holding the button for approximately 2 sec-
onds or more again returns the brightness
level to the previous level.
5
Multi-information display -
Type 1
E00519903608
1- mark display  P.5-6 1- mark display  P.5-6
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before 2- “ ” or “ ” mark indicator  P.5-5 2- ECO indicator  P.5-11
operating. 3- “ ” or “ ” mark indicator  P.5-5
The following information is included on the 3- Information screen  P.5-4
multi-information display: warnings, odome- Interrupt display screen  P.5-5 4- Information screen  P.5-5
ter, tripmeter, average and momentary fuel 4- Odometer  P.5-7 5- Fuel remaining display  P.5-6
consumption, average speed etc. 6- Overdrive OFF indicator  P.6-22
7- Odometer  P.5-7
8- Engine coolant temperature display
 P.5-6
9- Selector lever position indicator display
 P.6-20
10- Cruise control indicator display* 
P.6-34

NOTE
 The fuel units, display language, and other
settings can be changed.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
page 5-12.

Instruments and controls 5-3

 Multi-information display - Type 1

Multi-information display Information screen (when the Information screen (when the
switch operation mode is OFF) operation mode is changed
E00520002077 E00520202082
from OFF to ON)
Each time the multi-information display Each time you lightly press the multi-infor- E00520702276

switch is operated, the buzzer sounds and the mation display switch, the display screen When the operation mode is put in ON, the
multi-information display changes between switches in the following order. display screen switches in the following
information such as warnings, tripmeter,
5 average and momentary fuel consumption,
order.

distance range etc.

It is also possible to change elements such as
the language and units used on the multi-
information display by operating the multi-
*1
information display switch.

*2

*1: When there is no warning display

*2: When there is a warning display *: When the inspection time has arrived
1- Tripmeter  P.5-7 1- Screen when the operation mode is
2- OFF
Tripmeter  P.5-7
2- System check screen  P.5-9
3- ECO score display  P.5-11
3- Screen when the operation mode is ON
AFA111032 4- Service reminder  P.5-8
4- Service reminder  P.5-8
5- Redisplay of a warning display screen
 P.5-5

5-4 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 1
3- Driving range display  P.5-9
Information screen (when the ECO drive assist display  P.5-11
Interrupt display screen
operation mode is ON) 4- Average fuel consumption display 
E00522002042

E00521102512
P.5-10
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor- ECO drive assist display  P.5-11 Warning display
mation display switch, the display screen 5- Average speed display  P.5-10
switches in the following order. Momentary fuel consumption display When there is information to be announced,
 P.5-10 such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds and
6- ECO score display  P.5-11 the information screen is switched to the 5
7- Service reminder  P.5-8 warning display screen.
8- Function setting screen  P.5-12 Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
9- Redisplay of a warning display screen sary measures.
 P.5-5 Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-25.
When the cause of the warning display is
NOTE eliminated, the warning display goes out
 While driving, the service reminder are not
automatically.
*1 displayed even if you operate the multi-
information display switch. Always stop the To return to the screen displayed before
vehicle in a safe place before operating. the warning display
*2
 While driving, the function setting screen is
not displayed even if you operate the multi- Even if the cause of the warning display is
information display switch. not eliminated, you can return to the screen
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place that was displayed before the warning dis-
before operating and firmly apply the park- play.
ing brake and put the selector lever into the
“P” (PARK) position. If you press the multi-information display
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on switch, the display screen switches to the
page 5-12. screen that was displayed before the warning
 When there is information to be announced,
*1: When there is no warning display such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds and display and the mark (A) is displayed.
*2: When there is a warning display the screen display is switched.
1- Refer to “Interrupt display screen” on page
Tripmeter  P.5-7
5-5.
2- Tripmeter  P.5-7
Instruments and controls 5-5
 Multi-information display - Type 1

Other interrupt displays Engine coolant temperature

display
The operation status of each system is dis- E00533801203
played on the information screen.
Refer to the appropriate page in the warning
display list for further details.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page
5 5-31.

mark display
E00533901158
If you want to switch the display This indicates the engine coolant tempera-
This is displayed when you press the multi-
information display switch and return from ture.
Warning display screens with a “ ” or “ ”
the warning display screen to the previous If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink.
mark indicator displayed in the upper right of
screen. Pay careful attention to the engine coolant
the screen can be switched. If you want to
This mark is also displayed if there is another temperature display while you are driving.
switch the display, press the multi-informa-
warning other than the one displayed.
tion display switch as follows.
When the cause of the warning display is
“ ”: Press lightly. CAUTION
eliminated, the mark goes out automati-
“ ”: Press for approximately 2 seconds or  If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.
cally.
more. In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
NOTE and take the required measures.
Redisplay of a warning display  When the mark is displayed, the warning
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-3.
screen display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen.
When the mark is displayed, if you lightly
Refer to “Information screen (when the oper- Fuel remaining display
ation mode is OFF)” on page 5-4. E00522201962
press the multi-information display switch a Refer to “Information screen (when the oper-
few times, the warning display screen you This displays the amount of fuel remaining.
ation mode is ON)” on page 5-5.
switched from is redisplayed.

5-6 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 1
the information screen returns from the fuel
remaining warning display to the previous
Odometer
E00527801178
screen. If the warning display appears, refuel
as soon as possible. The odometer indicates the distance travelled.

Tripmeter
E00527901209

The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled 5

between two points.

F- Full Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter

E- Empty
It is possible to measure two currently
travelled distances, from home using trip-
NOTE meter and from a particular point on
 It may take several seconds to stabilise the
the way using tripmeter .
display after refilling the tank. CAUTION
 If fuel is added with the operation mode is in  Do not run out of fuel, or the catalytic con-
ON, the fuel gauge may incorrectly indicate verter may be adversely affected. If the
the fuel level. warning display appears, refuel as soon as To reset the tripmeter
 The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank possible.
filler is located on the left side of the body.
 If the fuel tank is almost empty, the “ ” To return the display to 0, hold down the
mark (B) on the fuel remaining display multi-information display switch for approxi-
flashes quickly (approximately twice per mately 2 seconds or more. Only the currently
Fuel remaining warning display second). Refuel as soon as possible.
E00522402408
displayed value will be reset.
When the fuel is reduced to approximately Example
8 litres, the information screen switches to the NOTE If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter
interrupt display of the fuel remaining warn-  On inclines or curves, the display may be
will be reset.
ing display, and the “ ” mark (B) on the fuel incorrect due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
remaining display flashes slowly (approxi-
mately once per second). After a few seconds,
Instruments and controls 5-7
 Multi-information display - Type 1
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
NOTE authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
 When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
dealer, it displays the time until the next
memory of tripmeter and are periodic inspection.
cleared, and the display returns to “0”.

To reset
Service reminder
5 E00522502366
The “---” display can be reset while the oper-
ation mode is in OFF. When the display is
Displays the approximate time until the next
reset, the time until the next periodic inspec-
periodic inspection recommended by
tion is displayed and the warning display is
MITSUBISHI MOTORS. “---” is displayed 1. Displays the time until the next periodic
no longer displayed when the operation mode
when the inspection time has arrived. inspection.
is changed from OFF to ON.

NOTE NOTE 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-

 Depending on the vehicle specifications, the  The distance is shown in units of 100 km tion display switch a few times, the infor-
displayed time may differ from the next peri- (100 miles). The time is shown in units of mation screen switches to the service
odic inspection time recommended by months. reminder display screen.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS.
In addition, the display settings for the next 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
periodic inspection time can be modified. tion is due. Please consult an authorised
To modify the display settings, have it
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
adjusted at an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer. At that time, when the operation mode is
For more details, consult an authorised
changed from OFF to ON, the warning
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
display is displayed for a few seconds on
the information screen.

5-8 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 1
2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
play switch for approximately 2 seconds
NOTE Driving range display
 “---” display cannot be reset when the opera- E00538001170
or more to display “ ” and make it flash. tion mode is in ON. This displays the approximate driving range
(If there is no operation for approximately  When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis- (how many more kilometres or miles you can
10 seconds with flashing, the display tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
drive). When the driving range falls below
returns to the previous screen.) play is reset and the time until the next
approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis-
periodic inspection is displayed.
played.
3. Lightly press the multi-information dis-
play switch while the icon is flashing to
 If you accidentally reset the display, we rec-
ommend you to consult an authorised Refuel as soon as possible. 5
change the display from “---” to MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
“CLEAR”. After this, the time until the
next periodic inspection will be displayed.
System check screen
E00531001230

When the operation mode is put in ON, the

system check screen is displayed for approxi-
NOTE
 The driving range is determined based on the
mately 4 seconds. If there is no fault, infor-
fuel consumption data. This may vary
mation screen (when the operation mode is depending on the driving conditions and hab-
ON) is displayed. its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn- rough guideline.
ing display.  When you refuel, the driving range display is
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-25. updated.
However, if you only add a small amount of
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
CAUTION Fill with a full tank whenever possible.
 The customer is responsible for making sure
 On rare occasions, the value displayed for
that periodic inspection and maintenance are
the driving range may change if you are
performed.
parked on an extremely steep incline. This is
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
due to the movement of fuel in the tank and
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc- NOTE does not indicate any malfunction.
tions.  The system check screen display varies
depending on the customer’s equipment.

Instruments and controls 5-9

 Multi-information display - Type 1
For the method for changing the average
NOTE NOTE speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
 The display setting can be changed to the  “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
function settings” on page 5-12.
preferred units (km or miles). sumption cannot be measured.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
page 5-12. mode”.
 The average fuel consumption will depend
on the driving conditions (road conditions,
Average fuel consumption dis-
5 play how you drive, etc.). The displayed fuel con-
sumption may vary from the actual fuel con-
E00531201362 sumption. Treat the fuel consumption NOTE
This displays the average fuel consumption displayed as just a rough guideline.  The average speed display can be reset sepa-
from the last reset to the present time.  The memory of the auto reset mode or man- rately for the auto reset mode and for the
ual reset mode for the average fuel consump- manual reset mode.
The reset mode conditions for the average
tion display is erased if the battery is  “---” is displayed when the average speed
fuel consumption display can be switched disconnected. cannot be measured.
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”.  The display setting can be changed to the  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver- preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK) mode”.
age fuel consumption and average speed” on or L/100 km}.  The display setting can be changed to the
page 5-12. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on preferred units (km/h or mph).
For information on how to change the aver- page 5-12. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to page 5-12.
“Changing the function settings” on page
5-12.
Average speed display  The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
E00533701228
ual reset mode for the average speed display
is erased if the battery is disconnected.
This displays the average speed from the last
reset to the present time.
The reset mode conditions for the average
speed display can be switched between “Auto
Momentary fuel consumption
reset” and “Manual reset”. display
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver- E00533601243
NOTE
age fuel consumption and average speed” on While driving, this displays the momentary
 The average fuel consumption display can be
reset separately for the auto reset mode and
page 5-12. fuel consumption, using a bar graph.
for the manual reset mode.

5-10 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 1

ECO indicator NOTE

A E00529301294  The ECO drive assist is displayed only when
vehicle is driving with the selector lever in
This indicator will be dis-
the “D” (DRIVE) position.
played when fuel-efficient
driving is achieved.
The “ ” mark (A) in the momentary fuel
gauge shows the average fuel consumption. ECO score display
When the value of momentary fuel consump- E00531601265 5
tion surpasses the value of average fuel con- ECO score indicates the points you have
sumption, the momentary fuel consumption is ECO drive assist display scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num-
displayed with a green bar graph. E00531501336 ber of leaves as follows:
Be conscious of maintaining the value of
This function displays how fuel-efficiently [When the operation mode is ON]
momentary fuel consumption below the value
you are driving under different driving condi- The display shows the score you achieved in
of average fuel consumption, it can help you
tions. the last several minutes.
drive with the better fuel consumption.
The ECO drive assist display will change as
follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using [When the operation mode is put in OFF]
NOTE the accelerator in a way well matched with The display shows the overall ECO score the
 When the momentary fuel consumption can- the vehicle speed. function has counted from the time when the
not be measured, the bar graph is not dis- operation mode is set to “ON” to the time
played.
when it is set to “OFF”.
 The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK) ECO drive level
or L/100 km}.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on ECO drive level
page 5-12.
 It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on Low High
page 5-12.

Low High

Instruments and controls 5-11

 Multi-information display - Type 1
3. Press and hold the multi-information dis- Refer to “Changing the reset mode for
Changing the function settings play switch for approximately 2 seconds average fuel consumption and average
E00522702485
or more to switch from the setting mode speed” on page 5-12.
The “Display language”, “Fuel consumption screen to the menu screen. Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption
unit”, and “Average fuel consumption and display unit” on page 5-13.
speed reset method” etc. setting can be modi- Refer to “Changing the display language”
fied as desired. on page 5-14.
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on
5 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. page 5-14.
Firmly apply the parking brake and put Refer to “Changing the time until “REST
the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) REMINDER” is displayed” on page 5-14.
position. Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound”
2. Lightly press the multi-information dis- on page 5-15.
play switch a few times to switch the Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel
information screen to the function setting consumption display” on page 5-15.
screen. Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
Refer to “Information screen (when the NOTE tings” on page 5-15.
operation mode is ON)” on page 5-5.  To return the menu screen to the function set-
ting screen, press and hold the multi-infor- NOTE
mation display switch for approximately
 If the battery is disconnected, these function
2 seconds or more.
settings are reset from memory and is auto-
 If no operations are made within approxi-
matically to the factory settings.
mately 30 seconds of the menu screen being
displayed, the display returns to the function
CAUTION setting screen.
Changing the reset mode for aver-
 For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.
While driving, even if you operate the multi- age fuel consumption and average
4. Select the item to change on the menu
information display switch, the function set-
screen and change to the desired setting. speed
ting screen is not displayed. E00522902517
Refer to the following items for further
details on the operation methods. The mode conditions for the average fuel
consumption and average speed display can
be switched between “Auto reset” and “Man-
ual reset”.

5-12 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 1
1. Press and hold the multi-information dis- Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
Changing the fuel consumption
play switch for approximately 2 seconds switching to manual mode is done, how-
or more to switch from the setting mode ever, the data from the last reset is dis- display unit
E00523002023
screen to the menu screen. played.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” The display unit for fuel consumption can be
on page 5-12. switched. The distance, speed, and amount
Auto reset mode
2. Lightly press the multi-information dis- units are also switched to match the selected
 When the average fuel consumption and fuel consumption unit.
play switch to select
“AVG (average fuel consumption and average speed are being displayed, if you
5
1. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
average speed setting)”. hold down the multi-information display
play switch for approximately 2 seconds
3. Press and hold the multi-information dis- switch, the average fuel consumption and
or more to switch from the setting mode
play switch for approximately 2 seconds average speed displayed at that time are
screen to the menu screen.
or more to switch from A/1 (Auto reset reset.
Refer to “Changing the function settings”
mode) to M/2/P (Manual reset mode), or  When the operation mode is in ACC or
on page 5-12.
from M/2/P to A/1. OFF for approximately 4 hours or longer,
2. Lightly press the multi-information dis-
The setting is changed to the selected the average fuel consumption display and
mode condition. average speed display are automatically play switch to select
reset. “AVG UNIT (fuel consumption display
setting)”.
Manual reset mode 3. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
NOTE play switch for approximately 2 seconds
 When the average fuel consumption and  The average fuel consumption display and or more to display “AVG UNIT”.
average speed are being displayed, if you average speed display can be reset separately 4. Lightly press the multi-information dis-
hold down the multi-information display for the auto reset mode and for the manual
play switch to select the units.
switch, the average fuel consumption and reset mode.
5. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
average speed displayed at that time are  The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
play switch for approximately 2 seconds
reset. ual reset mode for the average fuel consump-
tion display and average speed display is
or more to change the setting to the
 When the operation mode from ACC or
erased if the battery is disconnected. selected unit.
OFF to ON, the mode setting is automati-
cally switched from manual to auto.

Instruments and controls 5-13

 Multi-information display - Type 1
Refer to “Changing the function settings” Refer to “Changing the function settings”
NOTE on page 5-12. on page 5-12.
 The display units for the driving range, the
2. Lightly press the multi-information dis- 2. Lightly press the multi-information dis-
average fuel consumption, the average speed
and the momentary fuel consumption are play switch to select play switch to select “ ” (operation
switched, but the units for the indicating nee- “LANGUAGE” (language setting). sound setting).
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip- 3. Press and hold the multi-information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
meter will remain unchanged. play switch for approximately 2 seconds play switch for approximately 2 seconds
5 or more to display “LANGUAGE”.
4. Lightly press the multi-information dis-
or more to switch from ON (operation
The distance and speed units are also sound on) to OFF (operation sound off),
play switch to select the desired language. or from OFF to ON.
switched in the following combinations to
5. If you hold down the multi-information The setting is changed to the selected con-
match the selected fuel consumption unit.
display switch for approximately 2 sec- dition.
onds or more, the setting is changed to the
Distance Speed
Fuel con-
(driving (average
selected language. NOTE
sumption  The operation sound setting only deactivates
range) speed)
NOTE the operation sound of the multi-information
L/100 km km km/h  If “---” is selected in the language setting, a display switch and rheostat illumination but-
mpg (US) mile (s) mph warning message is not displayed when there ton. The warning display and other sounds
is a warning display or interrupt display. cannot be deactivated.
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
km/L km km/h
Operation sound setting Changing the time until “REST
Changing the display language
E00523401903 REMINDER” is displayed
E00523201914
You can turn off the operation sounds of the E00523501975

multi-information display switch and rheostat The time until the display appears can be
The language of the multi-information dis-
illumination button. changed.
play can be switched.
1. Press and hold the multi-information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
1. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
play switch for approximately 2 seconds play switch for approximately 2 seconds
play switch for approximately 2 seconds
or more to switch from the setting mode or more to switch from the setting mode
or more to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen. screen to the menu screen.
screen to the menu screen.

5-14 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 1
Refer to “Changing the function settings” 2. Lightly press the multi-information dis- The setting changes to the selected bar
on page 5-12. play switch to select (changing the graph setting.
2. Lightly press the multi-information dis- turn-signal sound).
play switch to select “ALARM” (rest time 3. Press and hold the multi-information dis- Returning to the factory settings
setting). play switch for approximately 2 seconds E00523602410
3. Press and hold the multi-information dis- or more to switch from 1 (turn-signal
play switch for approximately 2 seconds Many of the function settings can be returned
sound 1) to 2 (turn-signal sound 2), or to their factory settings.
or more to display “ALARM”.
4. Lightly press the multi-information dis-
from 2 to 1. 5
The setting changes to the selected turn- 1. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
play switch to select the time until the dis- signal sound. play switch for approximately 2 seconds
play. or more to switch from the setting mode
5. Press and hold the multi-information dis- screen to the menu screen.
play switch for approximately 2 seconds Changing the momentary fuel con-
Refer to “Changing the function settings”
or more, the setting is changed to the sumption display on page 5-12.
selected time. E00529201525
2. Lightly press the multi-information dis-
It is possible to change the bar graph setting play switch to select “RESET” (returning
NOTE of the momentary fuel consumption display. to the factory settings).
 The drive time is reset when the operation 3. When you press and hold the multi-infor-
mode is put in OFF. 1. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
mation display switch for approximately
play switch for approximately 2 seconds
5 seconds or more, the buzzer sounds and
or more to switch from the setting mode
all of the function settings are returned to
Changing the turn-signal sound screen to the menu screen.
the factory settings.
E00529101595 Refer to “Changing the function settings”
It is possible to change the turn-signal sound. on page 5-12.
2. Lightly press the multi-information dis- NOTE
1. Press and hold the multi-information dis- play switch to select (changing  The factory settings are as follows.
play switch for approximately 2 seconds the momentary fuel consumption display). • Average fuel consumption and average
or more to switch from the setting mode speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
3. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
screen to the menu screen. • Fuel consumption display unit: L/100 km
play switch for approximately 2 seconds
Refer to “Changing the function settings” • Display language: THAI
or more to switch from ON (with the
on page 5-12. • Operation sounds: ON (Operation sounds
green bar graph) to OFF (without the
on)
green bar graph), or from OFF to ON.
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF

Instruments and controls 5-15

 Multi-information display - Type 2
5- Service reminder  P.5-20
NOTE
• Turn-signal sound: Turn-signal sound 1
• Momentary fuel consumption with the NOTE
green bar graph: ON  When the ignition switch is OFF, the infor-
mation display and the service reminder are
displayed.
Multi-information display -
5 Type 2
E00519903611

Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before

operating.
The following information is included on the
multi-information display: odometer, tripme-
ter, average fuel consumption etc.

1- Engine coolant temperature display

 P.5-19
2- Selector lever position indicator dis-
play  P.6-20
3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-19
4- Information display  P.5-17

5-16 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 2

Information display
E00528201573

Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.

1- Odometer  P.5-18 6- Average fuel consumption display 

2- Tripmeter  P.5-18 P.5-19
3- 7- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-20
Tripmeter  P.5-18
8- Service reminder (month)  P.5-20
4- Meter illumination control  P.5-18
5- Driving range display  P.5-18

NOTE
 When the ignition switch is OFF, the information display and the service reminder are displayed.
 While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch.

Instruments and controls 5-17

 Multi-information display - Type 2

Odometer NOTE NOTE

E00527801181  When disconnecting the battery terminal, the  You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
The odometer indicates the distance travelled. memory of tripmeter and are tively for when the position lamps are illumi-
cleared, and the display returns to “0”. nated and when they are not.
Each time you reduce two brightness levels,
Tripmeter the segment display of the brightness level
decreases one by one.
E00527901212
Meter illumination control
5 The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled E00537901198
 The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the ignition switch is turned off.
between two points.
Each time you press and hold the multi-infor-
mation display switch (2) for approximately
Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter
2 seconds or more, there is a sound and the Driving range display
brightness of the instruments changes. E00538001138
It is possible to measure two currently
travelled distances, from home using trip- This displays the approximate driving range
(how many more kilometres or miles you can
meter and from a particular point on
drive). When the driving range falls below
the way using tripmeter . approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis-
played.

To reset the tripmeter NOTE

 The driving range is determined based on the
To return the display to 0, hold down the fuel consumption data. This may vary
multi-information display switch for approxi- depending on the driving conditions and hab-
mately 2 seconds or more. Only the currently its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
displayed value will be reset. 1- Brightness level rough guideline.
2- Multi-information display switch  When you refuel, the driving range display is
Example updated.
However, if you only add a small amount of
If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
will be reset. Fill with a full tank whenever possible.

5-18 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 2
This indicates the engine coolant tempera-
NOTE NOTE ture.
 On rare occasions, the value displayed for  “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
the driving range may change if you are sumption cannot be measured. If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink.
parked on an extremely steep incline. This is  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset Pay careful attention to the engine coolant
due to the movement of fuel in the tank and mode”. temperature display while you are driving.
does not indicate any malfunction.  The average fuel consumption will depend
 The display setting can be changed to the on the driving conditions (road conditions, CAUTION
preferred units (km or miles).
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
how you drive, etc.). The displayed fuel con-
sumption may vary from the actual fuel con-  If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.
5
page 5-21. sumption. Treat the fuel consumption In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.
displayed as just a rough guideline. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
 The memory of the manual reset mode or and take the required measures. Refer to
Average fuel consumption dis- auto reset mode for the average fuel con- “Engine overheating” on page 8-3.
play sumption display is erased if the battery is
E00531201245 disconnected.
This displays the average fuel consumption  The display setting can be changed to the Fuel remaining display
from the last reset to the present time. preferred units {km/L, L/100 km, mpg}. E00522201975
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
The reset mode conditions for the average The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel
page 5-21.
fuel consumption display can be switched level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. is ON.
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver- Engine coolant temperature
age fuel consumption” on page 5-21. display
For information on how to change the aver- E00533801216
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to
“Changing the function settings” on page
5-21.

NOTE
 The average fuel consumption display can be
reset separately for the auto reset mode and
for the manual reset mode.
1- Full

Instruments and controls 5-19

 Multi-information display - Type 2
0- Empty
CAUTION NOTE
 Do not run out of fuel, or the catalytic con-  Depending on the vehicle specifications, the
NOTE verter may be adversely affected. If the displayed time until the next periodic inspec-
 It may take several seconds to stabilise the warning display appears, refuel as soon as tion may differ from that of MITSUBISHI
display after refilling the tank. possible. MOTORS recommends.
 If fuel is added with the ignition switch is  If the fuel tank is almost empty, the last seg- In addition, the display settings for the next
ON, the fuel gauge may incorrectly indicate periodic inspection time can be modified.
ment of the fuel gauge goes out and “ ”
5 the fuel level.
 The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
mark flashes. Refuel as soon as possible.
To modify the display settings, have it
adjusted at an authorised MITSUBISHI
filler door is located on the left side of the MOTORS dealer.
vehicle. For more details, contact an authorised
NOTE MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
 On inclines or curves, the display may be
incorrect due to the movement of fuel in the
Fuel remaining warning display
tank. Distance
E00522402411

If the remaining fuel level is approximately

8 litres or less (one segment displayed) when
Service reminder
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” Month
E00522502379
position, the last segment of the fuel gauge
flashes. If the warning display appears, refuel Displays the approximate time until the next
as soon as possible. periodic inspection that MITSUBISHI
MOTORS recommends. “---” is displayed
when the inspection time has arrived.
The spanner mark indicates the periodic
inspection. 1. Displays the time until the next periodic
inspection.

NOTE
 The distance is shown in units of 100 km
(100 miles). The time is shown in units of
months.

5-20 Instruments and controls

 Multi-information display - Type 2
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
tion is due. Please consult an authorised
Changing the function settings
E00522702469
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS and “Fuel consumption unit” setting can be
dealer, it displays the time until the next modified as desired, when the ignition switch
periodic inspection. is ON.

CAUTION
5
To reset
 The driver should not operate the display
while the vehicle is in motion.
The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
 When operating the system, stop the vehicle
tion switch is in OFF. CAUTION in a safe area.
 The customer is responsible for making sure
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa- that periodic inspection and maintenance are
tion display switch a few times, the infor- performed.
mation display switches to the service Inspections and maintenance must be per-
Changing the reset mode for aver-
reminder display. formed to prevent accidents and malfunc- age fuel consumption
Refer to “Information display” on page tions. E00522902399

5-17. The mode conditions for the average fuel

2. Press and hold the multi-information dis- consumption display can be switched
play switch for approximately 2 seconds NOTE between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”.
or more to make the spanner mark start  “---” display cannot be reset when the igni-
flashing. (If there is no operation for tion switch is in ON. 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
approximately 10 seconds with flashing,  When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis- tion display switch a few times, the infor-
the display will revert to its original indi- tance and a certain period of time, the dis- mation display switches to the driving
cation.) play is reset and the time until the next range display.
3. Lightly press the multi-information dis- periodic inspection is displayed. Refer to “Information display” on page
play switch while the icon is flashing to  If you accidentally reset the display, consult 5-17.
an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS 2. Each time you press the multi-information
change the display from “---” to “cLEAr”.
dealer.
After this, the time until the next periodic display switch for 2 seconds or more on
inspection will be displayed. driving range display, you can switch
reset mode for average fuel consumption.

Instruments and controls 5-21

 Multi-information display - Type 2
(A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
Auto reset mode
mode) tion display switch a few times, the infor-
• When the average fuel consumption is mation display switches to the average
Auto reset mode Manual reset mode being displayed, if you hold down the fuel consumption display.
multi-information display switch, the Refer to “Information display” on page
average fuel consumption displayed at 5-17.
that time are reset. 2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
play switch for approximately 5 seconds
5 • When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position for approxi- or more until buzzer sound is heard twice.
mately 4 hours or longer, the average 3. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
fuel consumption display is automati- play switch to switch in sequence from
cally reset. “km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg” 
“km/L”.

Manual reset mode NOTE

 The average fuel consumption display can be
• When the average fuel consumption is reset separately for the auto reset mode and
being displayed, if you hold down the for the manual reset mode.
multi-information display switch, the  The memory of the manual reset mode or
average fuel consumption displayed at auto reset mode for the average fuel con-
that time is reset. sumption display is erased if the battery is
disconnected.
• When the ignition switch is turned from
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position to the
mode”.
“ON” position, the mode setting is auto-
matically switched from manual to auto.

Switching to auto occurs automatically. Changing the fuel consumption NOTE

If switching to manual mode is done, display unit  The display units for the driving range, the
however, the data from the last reset is E00523001954 average fuel consumption are switched, but
displayed. the units for the indicating needle (speedom-
The display unit for fuel consumption can be eter), the odometer, the tripmeter and the ser-
switched. The distance and amount units are vice reminder will remain unchanged.
also switched to match the selected fuel con-
sumption unit.

5-22 Instruments and controls

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)
The distance units is also switched in the fol- Distance
NOTE lowing combinations to match the selected Fuel consumption
 The memory of the unit setting is erased if
(driving range)
fuel consumption unit.
the battery is disconnected, and it returns km/L km
automatically to factory setting.
L/100 km km
mpg mile (s)

Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display 5
- Type 1)
E00523701397

Indicator and warning lamp list

E00523803044

1- Position lamp indicator lamp  P.5-34 2- Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard 3- Front fog lamp indicator lamp
warning indicator lamps  P.5-33  P.5-34

Instruments and controls 5-23

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)
4- High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-34
5- Electric power steering system (EPS)
warning lamp  P.6-31
6- Security indicator lamp  P.3-19
7- Check engine warning lamp  P.5-35
8- Charge warning lamp  P.5-35
5 9- Information screen display  P.5-24
10- Seat belt warning lamp  P.4-12
11- Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
warning lamp  P.4-27
12- Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF
indicator lamp  P.6-33
13- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning
lamp  P.6-29
14- Active Stability Control (ASC) indica-
tor lamp  P.6-33
15- Door-ajar warning lamp  P.5-36
16- Brake warning lamp  P.5-34

Information screen display

E00523901575

When there is information to be announced, such as lamp reminder, the buzzer sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer
to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-25.
Refer to “Other interrupt display list” on page 5-31.

5-24 Instruments and controls

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)

NOTE
 A warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound in the following rare cases.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as noise or strong electromagnetic waves, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of installed electrical equipment (including after-market parts).
If the warning display appears many times, consult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

5
Warning display list
E00524002844

Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

 There is a fault in the electronic immobi-  Put the operation mode in OFF, and then
lizer (Anti-theft starting system). start the engine again.
If the warning is not cancelled, please con-
tact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and consult an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

Instruments and controls 5-25

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)
Screen Cause Solution (Reference)
 There is a fault in the keyless operation Refer to “Keyless operation system” on page
system. 3-7.

Engine switch is pressed 1 time  Although the engine switch was pressed,  Touch the keyless operation key to the
the keyless operation key could not be engine switch.
detected. Refer to “If the keyless operation key is not
operating properly” on page 6-18.

Engine switch is pressed 2 times or more

5-26 Instruments and controls

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)
Screen Cause Solution (Reference)
 You put the operation mode in ON without  Fasten your seat belt properly.
fastening your seat belt. Refer to “Seat belt reminder” on page 4-12.

 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the  Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI

pre-tensioner system. MOTORS dealer to have the system 5
checked, immediately.
Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on
page 4-27.
 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible.
Refer to “Fuel remaining warning display”
on page 5-7.

 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

 You are driving with the parking brake still  Release the parking brake.
applied. Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-36.

 The brake fluid level in the reservoir has  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
fallen to a low level. place and consult an authorised
 There is a fault in the brake system. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-36.

Instruments and controls 5-27

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)
Screen Cause Solution (Reference)
 There is a fault in the charging system.  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and consult the nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “Charge warning display” on page
5-37.
 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
5 system. place and consult the nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on
page 5-37.
 You have forgotten to turn off the lamps. Refer to “Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.)
auto-cutout function” on page 5-38.

 The driver’s door is open when the opera-  Put the operation mode in OFF.
tion mode is in any mode other than OFF. Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder
system” on page 6-13.
 An attempt was made to lock all the doors  Put the operation mode in OFF.
and the tailgate when the operation mode is Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder
in any mode other than OFF. system” on page 6-13.
 There is a fault in the steering wheel lock.  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and consult an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

5-28 Instruments and controls

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)
Screen Cause Solution (Reference)
 The steering wheel is locked.  Press the engine switch while turning steer-
ing wheel.
Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page
6-13.

 The engine is stopped while the selector  Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK)
lever is in a position other than the “P” position to put the operation mode in OFF. 5
(PARK) position.

 The driver’s door is opened with the steer- Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page 6-13.
ing wheel unlocked.

 There is a fault in the EPS.  Have the vehicle inspected by an author-

ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as
soon as possible.
Refer to “Electric power steering system
(EPS)” on page 6-31.
 The A/T fluid temperature is too high. Refer to “4-speed automatic transmission:
When a malfunction occurs in the A/T” on
page 6-23.

 There is a fault in the A/T.  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-

ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “4-speed automatic transmission:
When a malfunction occurs in the A/T” on
page 6-23.

Instruments and controls 5-29

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)
Screen Cause Solution (Reference)
 There is a fault in the hill start assist.  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “Warning lamp/display” on page
6-27.
 There is a fault in the active stability con-  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
trol (ASC). ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
5 Refer to “ASC warning lamp/display” on
page 6-34.
 There is a fault in the ABS.  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driv-
ing, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
take corrective measures.
Refer to “ABS warning lamp/display” on
page 6-30.
 The engine is overheated.  Stop the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-3.

5-30 Instruments and controls

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)

Other interrupt display list

E00524202820

Screen System operation status Reference

 When starting the engine, the selector lever  Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK)
is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) position, depress the brake pedal with the
or the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you right foot. Then, press the engine switch.
pressed the engine switch without depress- Refer to “Starting the engine” on page 5
ing the brake pedal. 6-16.
 When communication was successful Refer to “If the keyless operation key is not
when the keyless operation key was operating properly” on page 6-18.
touched to the engine switch.

This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.

Screen Solution
We recommend you to have it checked.
Refer to “Service reminder” for further details on page 5-8.

Instruments and controls 5-31

 Indicator lamp, warning lamp, and information screen display list (multi-information display - Type 1)
The setting for rest interval can be changed.

Screen Solution
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST REMINDER” is displayed” on page 5-14.
5 The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds approximately every 5 minutes to encourage you to
take a rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous dis-
play screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the buzzer and display encourage
you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• Put the operation mode in OFF.
• The multi-information display switch is held for approximately 2 seconds or more.

5-32 Instruments and controls

 Indicator and warning lamps (multi-information display - Type 2)

Indicator and warning lamps (multi-information display - Type 2)

E00501504572

1- Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard 12- Security indicator lamp  P.3-19

For details, refer to “Steering wheel
Indicator lamps
warning indicator lamps  P.5-33
E00501601266
2- High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-34 lock” on page 6-13.
3- Overdrive OFF indicator lamp  13- Door-ajar warning lamp  P.5-36
P.6-22 14- Seat belt warning lamp  P.4-27 Turn-signal indicator
4- Position lamp indicator lamp  P.5-34 15- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamps/Hazard warning indica-
lamp  P.6-29
5- Electric power steering system (EPS) tor lamps
warning lamp  P.6-31 16- Active Stability Control (ASC) indica-
E00501701762
6- Brake warning lamp  P.5-34 tor lamp  P.6-33
7- ECO indicator lamp  P.5-34 17- Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF These indicator lamps blink on
8- Charge warning lamp  P.5-35 indicator lamp  P.6-33 and off when a turn-signal
9- Check engine warning lamp  P.5-35 18- Supplemental restraint system (SRS) lamp is operating.
10- Oil pressure warning lamp  P.5-36 warning lamp  P.4-27
11- Multi-information display  P.5-16

Instruments and controls 5-33

 Warning lamps
Always make sure that the lamp goes off
NOTE Position lamp indicator lamp before driving.
 If the blinking is too fast, the cause may be a E00508901385
With the ignition switch or the operation
blown lamp bulb or a faulty turn-signal con-
This indicator lamp illumi- mode in ON, the brake warning lamp illumi-
nection.
nates while the position lamps nates under the following conditions:
are on.
 When the hazard warning lamp switch is  When the parking brake has been applied.
pressed, all turn-signal lamps will flash on  When the brake fluid level in the reservoir
5 and off continuously. falls to a low level.
 When the hazard warning lamps automat-  When the brake force distribution func-
ically activate due to sudden braking ECO indicator lamp (vehicle tion is not operating correctly.
while driving. Refer to “Emergency stop
equipped with the multi-infor- With the ignition switch or the operation
signal system” on page 6-28.
mation display - Type 2) mode in ON, a buzzer sounds under the con-
E00529801198 dition that the vehicle speed exceeds a certain
High-beam indicator lamp speed with the parking brake applied.
This indicator lamp illumi-
E00501801372
nates when fuel-efficient
This indicator lamp illumi- driving is achieved. CAUTION
nates when the high-beam is  In the situations listed below, brake perfor-
used. mance may be compromised or the vehicle
may become unstable if brakes are applied
suddenly; consequently, avoid driving at
high speeds or applying the brakes suddenly.
Warning lamps Furthermore, immediately the vehicle should
E00502401492
Front fog lamp indicator lamp* be brought to a stop in a safe location and
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
E00501901748
Brake warning lamp MOTORS dealer should be contacted.
This lamp illuminates while E00502504061 • The brake warning lamp does not illumi-
This lamp illuminates when nate when the parking brake is applied or
the front fog lamps are on.
the ignition switch is turned to does not turn off when the parking brake is
released.
the “ON” position or the oper-
ation mode is put in ON, and
goes off after a few seconds.

5-34 Instruments and controls

 Warning lamps
to have the system checked as soon as possi- This data will be erased if a battery cable is
CAUTION ble. disconnected which will make a rapid diagno-
• The brake warning lamp and the ABS
This lamp will also illuminate when the igni- sis difficult. Do not disconnect a battery cable
warning lamp illuminate at the same time.
tion switch is turned “ON” or the operation when the check engine warning lamp is ON.
For details, refer to “ABS warning
lamp/display” on page 6-30. mode is put in ON, and goes off after the
engine has started. If it does not go off after
• The brake warning lamp remains illumi-
the engine has started, we recommend you to
Charge warning lamp
nated while driving. E00502702450
have the vehicle checked.
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
following manner when brake performance
This lamp illuminates when 5
the ignition switch is turned to
has deteriorated. CAUTION the “ON” position or the oper-
• Depress the brake pedal harder than usual.  Prolonged driving with this lamp on may ation mode is put in ON, and
Even if the brake pedal moves down to the cause further damage to the emission control goes off after the engine has
very end of its possible stroke, keep it system. It could also affect fuel economy and
pressed down hard. started.
drivability. On vehicle equipped with the multi-informa-
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking  If the lamp does not illuminate when the
to reduce your speed and carefully pull the tion display - type 1, a warning is also dis-
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
parking brake lever. played on the multi-information display.
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, we
recommend you to have the system checked.
Depress the brake pedal to operate the stop
lamp to alert the vehicles behind you.
 If the lamp illuminates while the engine is CAUTION
running, avoid driving at high speeds and  If it illuminates while the engine is running,
have the system inspected by an authorised there is a problem in the charging system.
Check engine warning lamp MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon as Immediately park your vehicle in a safe
E00502603355 possible. place and we recommend you to have it
This lamp is a part of an Accelerator pedal and brake pedal response checked.
onboard diagnostic system may be negatively influenced under these
conditions.
which monitors the emissions,
engine control system or A/T
control system.
If a problem is detected in one of these sys-
NOTE
 The engine electronic control module
tems, this lamp illuminates or flashes.
accommodating the onboard diagnostic sys-
Although your vehicle will usually be driva-
tem has various fault data (especially about
ble and not need towing, we recommend you the exhaust emission) stored.

Instruments and controls 5-35

 Information screen display (vehicle equipped with the multi-information display - Type 1)

Oil pressure warning lamp NOTE Information screen display

(vehicle equipped with the  This warning lamp does not indicate the
(vehicle equipped with the
amount of oil level in the engine. This must
multi-information display - be determined by checking the oil level on multi-information display -
Type 2) the dipstick, while the engine is switched off.
Type 1)
E00502801887
E00524601276
This lamp illuminates when
5 the ignition switch is turned to Door-ajar warning lamp Brake warning display
the “ON” position, and goes E00503302088
off after the engine has This lamp illuminates when a
E00524701613

started. If it illuminates while door or the tailgate is either

the engine is running, the oil pressure is too open or not completely closed.
low. If the vehicle speed reaches
Turn the engine off and have it inspected. approximately 8 km/h with a
door or the tailgate open or incompletely
CAUTION closed, a buzzer sounds 4 times as a warning. This warning is displayed if you drive with
 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is the parking brake still applied. The warning
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn- CAUTION lamp in the instrument cluster also illumi-
ing lamp is illuminated, the engine may burn  Before moving your vehicle, check that the nates when the parking brake is applied.
out and be damaged. warning lamp is OFF. If this warning is displayed, lower the parking
 If the warning lamp is illuminated while the
brake lever fully.
engine is running, immediately park your
vehicle in a safe place and check the engine
oil level. CAUTION
Refer to “Maintenance: Engine oil” on page  If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
10-4. parking brake, the brake will be overheated,
 If the warning lamp is illuminated while the resulting in ineffective braking and possible
engine oil level is normal, have it inspected. brake failure.

5-36 Instruments and controls

 Information screen display (vehicle equipped with the multi-information display - Type 1)

CAUTION Oil pressure warning display

• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking E00524901484

to reduce your speed and carefully pull the

parking brake lever.

Depress the brake pedal to operate the stop

When the operation mode is put in ON, if the
lamp to alert the vehicles behind you.
brake fluid is low, this warning is displayed.
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster 5
also illuminates. Charge warning display If the engine oil pressure drops while the
E00524801382 engine is running, the warning display is dis-
played on the information screen in the multi-
CAUTION information display.
 If this warning stays illuminated and does
not go out while driving, there is a danger of
ineffective braking. If this happens, immedi- CAUTION
ately park your vehicle in a safe place and  If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is
we recommend you to have it checked. low, or the oil level is normal but the warn-
 If the brake warning display is displayed and If there is a fault with the charging system, ing is displayed, the engine may burn out and
the brake warning lamp and the ABS warn- the warning display is displayed on the infor- be damaged.
ing lamp are illuminated at the same time, mation screen in the multi-information dis-  If the warning is displayed while the engine
the braking force distribution function will play. The warning lamp in the instrument is running, immediately park your vehicle in
not operate, so the vehicle may be destabi- cluster also illuminates. a safe place and check the engine oil level.
lised during sudden braking. Avoid sudden Refer to “Maintenance: Engine oil” on page
braking and high-speed driving, stop the 10-4.
vehicle in a safe place, and we recommend CAUTION  If the warning is displayed while the engine
you to have it checked.  If the warning is displayed while the engine oil level is normal, have it inspected.
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the is running, immediately park your vehicle in
following manner when brake performance a safe place and we recommend you to have
has deteriorated. it checked.
NOTE
• Depress the brake pedal harder than usual.
 This warning display does not indicate the
Even if the brake pedal moves down to the
amount of oil level in the engine. This must
very end of its possible stroke, keep it
be determined by checking the oil level on
pressed down hard.
the dipstick, while the engine is switched off.

Instruments and controls 5-37

 Combination headlamps and dipper switch
OFF All lamps off The ignition switch is turned to the
Combination headlamps “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key is
Position, tail, licence plate and instru-
and dipper switch ment panel lamps on
removed from the ignition switch.
E00506005250 [For vehicles equipped with the keyless
Headlamps and other lamps go on operation system]
Headlamps The operation mode is put in OFF or
ACC.
Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp,
5 NOTE etc.) auto-cutout function NOTE
 Do not leave the lamps on for a long time E00532701931
 The lamp auto-cutout will not function when
while the engine is stationary (not running).  If the following operation is performed
the lamp switch is in the “ ” position.
A run-down battery could result. while the lamp switch is in the “ ” posi-  The lamp auto-cutout function can also be
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been tion, the lamps are automatically turned disabled.
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
off when the driver’s door is opened. For further information, please contact an
becomes foggy, but this does not indicate a
functional problem.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will keyless operation system]
remove the fog. However, if water gathers The ignition switch is turned to the
inside the lamp, we recommend you to have “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or the key is When you want to keep the lamps
checked. removed from the ignition switch. on:
[For vehicles equipped with the keyless
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. operation system] 1. In the following cases, turn the lamp
The operation mode is put in OFF or switch to the “OFF” position.
ACC. [Except for vehicles equipped with the
 If the following operation is performed keyless operation system]
while the lamp switch is in the “ ” posi- The ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
tion, the lamps are automatically turned “ACC” position.
off if the driver’s door then remains [For vehicles equipped with the keyless
closed for approximately 3 minutes. operation system]
[Except for vehicles equipped with the The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
keyless operation system] 2. Turn on the lamps with the switch in the
“ ” or “ ” position again, then the
lamps will remain on.

5-38 Instruments and controls

 Combination headlamps and dipper switch

Lamp monitor buzzer Welcome light

E00506101862 E00528902506

If the following operation is performed, a This function turns on the position and tail
buzzer will sound to remind the driver to turn lamps for approximately 30 seconds after the
off the lamps. UNLOCK switch on the key is pressed when
[Except for vehicles equipped with the key- the combination headlamps and dipper switch
less operation system] is in the “OFF” position.
If the driver’s door is opened when the key is 5
in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or NOTE
removed from the ignition switch while the  While the welcome light function is operat-
lamps are on. ing, perform one of the following operations
[For vehicles equipped with the keyless oper- to cancel the function.
ation system] Headlamp flasher • Press the LOCK switch on the key.
If the driver’s door is opened when the opera- E00506301486
• Turn the combination headlamps and dip-
tion mode is in ACC or OFF while the lamps The high-beams flash when the lever is per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
are on. pulled slightly (2), and will go off when it is • Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
released. tion or put the operation mode in ON.
In both cases, the buzzer will automatically When the high-beam is on, the high-beam  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
stop if the auto-cutoff function is activated, indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will • The headlamps can be set to come on in the
the lamp switch is turned off, or the door is illuminate. low beam setting.
closed. • The welcome light function can be deacti-
vated.
NOTE
Dipper (high/low beam change)  The high-beams can also flash when the
For further information, please contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
E00506201948 lamp switch is OFF.
When the lamp switch is in the “ ” posi-  If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps
tion, the beam changes from high to low (or set to high-beam, the headlamps are auto-
matically returned to their low-beam setting Coming home light
low to high) each time the lever is pulled
when the lamp switch is next turned to the E00529002197
fully (1). While the high-beam is on, the
“ ” position. This function turns on the headlamps in the
high-beam indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster will also illuminate. low beam setting for approximately 30 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned to the

Instruments and controls 5-39

 Turn-signal lever
“OFF” position or the operation mode is put 4. The headlamps will come on in the low
in OFF. beam setting for approximately 30 sec- Turn-signal lever
onds. After the headlamps go off, the E00506503264

1. Turn the combination headlamps and dip- headlamps can be turned on again in the The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is
per switch to the “OFF” position. low beam setting for approximately operated (with the ignition switch or the oper-
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” 30 seconds by pulling the turn-signal ation mode is in ON). At the same time, the
position or put the operation mode in lever towards you within 60 seconds of turn-signal indicator flashes.
OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the turning the ignition switch to the “OFF”
5 engine, remove the key from the ignition position or putting the operation mode in
switch. OFF.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition To turn on the headlamps again after
switch to the “LOCK” position or putting 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch
the operation mode in OFF, pull the turn- to the “LOCK” position or putting the
signal lever towards you. operation mode in OFF, repeat the process
from step 1.

NOTE
 While the coming home light function is
operating, perform one of the following 1- Turn-signals
operations to cancel the function. When making a normal turn, use posi-
• Pull the turn-signal lever towards you. tion (1). The lever will return automati-
• Turn the combination headlamps and dip- cally when cornering is completed.
per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position. 2- Lane-change signals
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- When moving the lever to (2) slightly
tion or put the operation mode in ON. to change a lane, the turn-signal lamps
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: and indicator lamp in the instrument
• The time that the headlamps remain on can cluster will only flash while the lever is
be changed. operated.
• The coming home light function can be Also, when you move the lever to (2)
deactivated. slightly then release it, the turn-signal
For further information, please contact an lamps and indicator lamp in the instru-
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. ment cluster will flash 3 times.

5-40 Instruments and controls

 Hazard warning flasher switch

NOTE Hazard warning flasher NOTE

 If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the
bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned
switch  While the hazard warning lamps are blinking
due to having manually pressed the switch,
E00506602398
out. Have the vehicle inspected by an author- the emergency stop signal system does not
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. Use the hazard warning flasher switch when operate. Refer to “Emergency stop signal
 It is possible to activate the following func- the vehicle has to be parked on the road for system” on page 6-28.
tions: any emergency.
• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps when the The hazard warning flashers can always be 5
lever is operated with the ignition switch or
the operation mode is in ACC.
operated, regardless of the ignition switch Front fog lamp switch*
position or the operation mode. E00506802172
• The turn-signal lamps 3-flash function for
lane changes can be deactivated. Press the switch to turn on the hazard warn- The front fog lamps can be operated while the
• The time required to operate the lever for ing flashers, all turn-signal lamps flash con- headlamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the knob
the 3-flash function can be adjusted. tinuously. in the “ON” direction to turn on the front fog
For further information, please contact an To turn them off, press the switch again. lamps. An indicator lamp in the instrument
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
cluster will also come on. Turn the knob in
 It is possible to change the tone of a sound-
the “OFF” direction to turn off the front fog
ing buzzer as the turn-signal lamps flash.
[Vehicle equipped with the multi-informa- lamps. The knob will automatically return to
tion display - type 1] its original position when you release it.
Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound”
on page 5-15.
[Vehicle equipped with the multi-informa-
tion display - type 2]
For further information, please contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

Instruments and controls 5-41

 Wiper and washer switch

NOTE Windscreen wipers To adjust intermittent intervals

 The front fog lamps are automatically turned E00516902323

off when the headlamps or tail lamps are With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive)
turned off. To turn the front fog lamps on NOTE position, the intermittent intervals can be
again, turn the knob in the “ON” direction  To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear adjusted by turning the knob (A).
after turning on the headlamps or tail lamps. window wiper will automatically perform
 Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of several continuous operations if the selector
5 fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
lever is put in the “R” (REVERSE) position
while the windscreen wipers are operating.
Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
on page 5-43.
Wiper and washer switch
E00507102882

The windscreen wipers and washer can be

operated with the ignition switch or the oper-
ation mode in ON or ACC.
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or 1- Fast
rear window, do not operate the wipers until 2- Slow
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
NOTE
 The speed-sensitive-operation function of
CAUTION the windscreen wipers can be deactivated.
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the MIST- Misting function
For further information, please contact an
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may The wipers will operate once.
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm OFF- Off
the glass with the defroster before using the INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
washer. LO- Slow Misting function
HI- Fast Move the lever in the direction of the arrow
and release, to operate the wipers once.
Use this function when you are driving in
mist or drizzle.

5-42 Instruments and controls

 Wiper and washer switch

CAUTION
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
freeze resulting in poor visibility. Heat the
glass with the defroster or demister before
using the washer.

5
NOTE
 The wipers’ operation combined with spray-
ing the washer fluid can be deactivated. For INT - The wiper operates continuously
more details, consult an authorised
for several seconds then operates
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Windscreen washer intermittently at intervals of
E00507202968 approximately every 8 seconds.
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the OFF - Off
Rear window wiper and washer The washer fluid will be sprayed
windscreen by pulling the lever towards you. E00507302813 -
The wipers operate automatically several onto the rear window when the
The rear window wiper and washer switch knob is turned fully in either direc-
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
can be operated with the ignition switch or tion.
the operation mode in ON or ACC. The wipers operate automatically
several times while the washer fluid
is being sprayed.

Instruments and controls 5-43

 Rear window demister switch
During cold weather, add a recommended
NOTE Precautions to observe when washer solution that will not freeze in the
 The rear window wiper will automatically using wipers and washers washer reservoir. Failure to do so could
perform several continuous operations if the E00507601688 result in loss of washer function and frost
selector lever is put in the “R” (REVERSE)
 If the moving wipers become blocked damage to the system components.
position while the windscreen wipers or the
partway through a sweep by ice or other
rear window wiper is operating. (automatic
deposits on the glass, the wipers may tem-
operation mode)
porarily stop operating to prevent the Rear window demister
5 After the automatic operation, the rear win-
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is motor from overheating. In this case, park switch
in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the the vehicle in a safe place, turn the igni- E00507903092
“INT” position, the rear window wiper will tion switch to the “LOCK” position or put
The rear window demister switch can be
return to the intermittent operation. the operation mode in OFF, and then
It is possible to set the rear window wiper to
operated when the engine is running.
remove the ice or other deposits. Because
perform the automatic operation only if the Press the switch to turn on the rear window
the wipers will start operating again after
selector lever is put in the “R” (REVERSE) demister. It will be turned off automatically in
the wiper motor cools down, check that
position while the rear window wiper is approximately 20 minutes. To turn off the
the wipers operate before using them.
operating with the knob in the “INT” posi- demister within approximately 20 minutes,
 Do not use the wipers when the glass is
tion. press the switch again.
For further information, please contact an dry.
The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. They may scratch the glass surface and
the demister is on.
 If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the the blades wear out prematurely.
knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to  Before using the wipers in cold weather,
operate the rear window wiper continuously. check that the wiper blades are not frozen
(continuous operation mode) onto the glass. The motor may burn out if
Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop the wipers are used with the blades frozen
the rear window wiper continuous operation. onto the glass.
 The interval for intermittent operation can be  Avoid using the washer continuously for
adjusted.
more than 20 seconds. Do not operate the
For further information, please contact an
washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
 Periodically check the level of washer
fluid in the reservoir and refill if required.

5-44 Instruments and controls

 Horn switch

NOTE
 The demister switch is not to melt snow but
to clear mist. Remove snow before use of the
demister switch.
 To avoid unnecessary discharge of the bat-
tery, do not use the rear window demister
during starting of the engine or when the
engine is not running. Turn the demister off
immediately after the window is clear.
5
 When cleaning the inside of the rear window,
use a soft cloth and wipe gently along the
heater wires, being careful not to damage the
wires.
 Do not allow objects to touch the inside of
the rear window glass, damaged or broken
wires may result.

Horn switch
E00508001852

Press the steering wheel on or around the

“ ”mark.

Instruments and controls 5-45

Starting and driving

Economical driving ..........................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-3
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-3
Running-in recommendations ..........................................................6-4
Parking brake ...................................................................................6-4 6
Parking .............................................................................................6-5
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ....................................6-6
Inside rear-view mirror ....................................................................6-7
Outside rear-view mirrors ................................................................6-8
Ignition switch* ..............................................................................6-10
Engine switch*................................................................................6-11
Steering wheel lock ........................................................................6-13
Starting and stopping the engine ....................................................6-15
4-speed automatic transmission .....................................................6-19
Braking ..........................................................................................6-25
Hill start assist ................................................................................6-26
Brake assist system ........................................................................6-28
Emergency stop signal system .......................................................6-28
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .......................................................6-29
Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................6-31
Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................6-32
Cruise control*................................................................................6-34
Rear-view camera* .........................................................................6-39
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-41
 Economical driving

Economical driving Shifting Tyre inflation pressure

E00600102679

For economical driving, there are some tech- Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular
nical requirements that have to be met. The speed. Always use the highest shift position intervals. Low tyre inflation pressure
prerequisite for low fuel consumption is a possible. increases road resistance and fuel consump-
properly adjusted engine. In order to achieve tion. In addition, low tyre pressures adversely
longer life of the vehicle and the most eco- affect tyre wear and driving stability.
City traffic
nomical operation, have the vehicle Serviced
6 by an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer at regular intervals in accordance with
Frequent starting and stopping increases the Cargo loads
average fuel consumption. Use roads with
the service standards.
smooth traffic flow whenever possible. When Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the
Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas
driving on congested roads, avoid use of a luggage compartment. Especially during city
and noise are highly influenced by personal
low shift position at high engine speeds. driving where frequent starting and stopping
driving habits as well as the particular operat-
is necessary, the increased weight of the vehi-
ing conditions. The following points should
cle will greatly affect fuel consumption. Also
be observed in order to minimize wear of Idling avoid driving with unnecessary luggage or
brakes, tyres and engine as well as to reduce
carriers, etc., on the roof; the increased air
environmental pollution. The vehicle consumes fuel even during resistance will increase fuel consumption.
idling. Avoid extended idling whenever pos-
Accelerating and decelerating sible.
Cold engine starting
Drive according to traffic conditions, and Speed Starting of a cold engine consumes more fuel.
avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration, and
Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused
sudden braking, as they will increase fuel At higher the vehicle speed, more fuel is con- by keeping a hot engine running. After the
consumption. sumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a engine is started, commence driving as soon
slight release of the accelerator pedal will as possible.
save a significant amount of fuel.

6-2 Starting and driving

 Driving, alcohol and drugs

Air conditioning Safe driving techniques

E00600301935

The use of the air conditioner will increase Driving safety and protection against injury
the fuel consumption. cannot be fully ensured. However, we recom-
mend that you pay extra attention to the fol-
lowing:
Driving, alcohol and drugs
E00600201211

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent Seat belts

causes of accidents. 6
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired Before starting the vehicle, make sure that
even with blood alcohol levels far below the you and your passengers have fastened your
legal minimum. If you have been drinking, seat belts. Carrying children in the vehicle
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use  Never leave your vehicle unattended with
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
Floor mats the key and children inside the vehicle.
ing a cold shower will not make you sober. Children may play with the driving con-
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription trols and this could lead to an accident.
WARNING  Make sure that infants and small children
drugs affect your alertness, perception and  Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by cor-
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or are properly restrained in accordance with
rectly laying floor mats that are suitable
pharmacist before driving while under the for the vehicle.
the laws and regulations, and for maxi-
influence of any of these medications. To prevent the floor mats from slipping mum protection in case of an accident.
out of position, securely retain them using  Prevent children from playing in the lug-
the hook etc. gage compartment. It is quite dangerous
WARNING Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal to allow them to play there while the vehi-
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. or laying one floor mat on top of another cle is moving.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your can obstruct pedal operation and lead to a
reflexes are slower and your judgment is serious accident.
impaired. Loading luggage

When loading luggage, be careful not to load

above the height of seats. This is dangerous

Starting and driving 6-3

 Running-in recommendations
not only because rearward vision will be *1: With overdrive switched OFF
obstructed, but also the luggage may be pro-
CAUTION
*2: With overdrive switched ON  Normally, When you intend to apply the
jected into the passenger compartment under
parking brake, firmly depress the brake pedal
hard braking.
to bring the vehicle to a complete stop before
Parking brake pulling the parking brake lever.
Running-in recommenda- E00600502976 Pulling the parking brake lever with the
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- vehicle moving could make the rear wheels
tions plete stop, fully apply the parking brake suffi- lock up, thereby making the vehicle unstable.
E00600404764
ciently to hold the vehicle. It could also make the parking brake mal-
6 During the running-in period for the first function.
1,000 km, it is advisable to drive your new
vehicle using the following precautions as a
To apply
guideline to aid long life as well as future
E00650200059 NOTE
economy and performance.  Apply sufficient force to the parking brake
lever to hold the vehicle stationary after the
 Do not race the engine at high speeds. foot brake is released.
 Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking  If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle
and prolonged high-speed running. stationary after the foot brake is released,
contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
 Keep to the running-in speed limit shown
MOTORS dealer.
below.
Please note that the legal speed limits dis-
played must be adhered to.
 Do not exceed loading limits.
 Refrain from towing a trailer. 1- Firmly depress and hold the brake
pedal, then pull the lever up without
Shift point Speed limit pressing the button at the end of hand
“L” (LOW) 30 km/h grip.
“2” (SECOND) 60 km/h
“D” (DRIVE)*1 100 km/h

“D” (DRIVE)*2 105 km/h

6-4 Starting and driving

 Parking

To release CAUTION NOTE

E00650300063  Before driving, be sure that the parking  To prevent the parking brake from being
brake is fully released and brake warning released unintentionally, the lever must be
lamp is off. pulled up slightly before it can be pushed
If you drive without the parking brake fully down. Simply pressing the button does not
released, the warning display will appear on enable the lever to be pushed down.
the information screen in the multi-informa-
tion display and a buzzer sound when the
vehicle speed exceeds a certain speed.
Parking
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brake will be overheated, E00600602951
6
resulting in ineffective braking and possible To park the vehicle, firmly apply the parking
brake failure and rear axle damage. brake, and then set the selector lever to “P”
1- Firmly depress and hold the brake (PARK) position.
Warning lamp
pedal, then pull the lever up slightly.
2- Press the button at the end of hand grip. Parking on a hill
3- Lower the lever fully.
Warning display To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow
these procedures:

Parking on a downhill slope

 If the brake warning lamp does not extin- Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and
guish when the parking brake is fully move the vehicle forward until the kerb side
released, the brake system may be an abnor- wheel gently touches the kerb.
mal. Apply the parking brake and place the selec-
Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
tor lever into the “P” (PARK) position.
MOTORS dealer.
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp”
on page 5-34.

Starting and driving 6-5

 Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
Parking on an uphill slope WARNING area.
 Leaving the engine running risks injury or
Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and death from accidentally moving the selec-
move the vehicle back until the kerb side tor lever or the accumulation of toxic Steering wheel height and
exhaust fumes on the passenger compart-
wheel gently touches the kerb.
ment. reach adjustment
Apply the parking brake and place the selec- E00600701740
tor lever into the “P” (PARK) position. 1. Release the lever while holding the steer-
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. ing wheel up.
Where you park
6 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
NOTE position.
 Be sure to apply the parking brake before WARNING 3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull-
moving selector lever to the “P” (PARK)  Do not park your vehicle in areas where
ing the lever fully upward.
position. If you move selector lever to the combustible materials such as dry grass or
“P” (PARK) position before applying the leaves can come in contact with a hot
parking brake, it may be difficult to disen- exhaust, since a fire could occur.
gage selector lever from the “P” (PARK)
position when next you drive the vehicle,
requiring application of a strong force the
selector lever to move from the “P” (PARK) Do not keep the steering wheel
position. fully turned for a long time

More effort could be required to turn the

Parking with the engine run- steering wheel.
ning Refer to “Electric power steering system
(EPS)” on page 6-31. A- Locked
B- Release
Never leave the engine running while you
take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the When leaving the vehicle
engine running in a closed or poorly venti- WARNING
lated place.
Always carry the key and lock all doors when  Do not attempt to adjust the steering
leaving the vehicle unattended. wheel while you are driving the vehicle.

6-6 Starting and driving

 Inside rear-view mirror

Inside rear-view mirror To reduce the glare

E00600802243

Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can
any seat adjustments so you have a clear view be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the
to the rear of the vehicle. glare from the headlamps of vehicles behind
you during night driving.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
mirror while driving. This can be danger- 6
ous.
Always adjust the mirror before driving.

To adjust the mirror position

Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the
view through the rear window.
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
left/right to adjust its position.
To adjust the vertical mirror
position 1- Normal
2- Anti-glare
It is possible to move the mirror up and down
to adjust its position.

Starting and driving 6-7

 Outside rear-view mirrors

Outside rear-view mirrors CAUTION

E00600901898  Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror
retracted.
The lack of rearward visibility normally pro-
To adjust the mirror position vided by the mirror could lead to an accident.
E00601002242

WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
Retracting and extending the mir-
rors using the mirror retractor
6 mirrors while driving. This can be danger-
ous. switch
Always adjust the mirrors before driving. L- Left outside mirror adjustment
 Your vehicle is equipped with convex type R- Right outside mirror adjustment
With the ignition switch or the operation
mirrors.
Please take into consideration, but objects
mode in ON or ACC, press the mirror retrac-
you see in the mirror will look smaller and
2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or tor switch to retract the mirrors.
farther away compared to a normal flat down to adjust the mirror position. Press it again to extend the mirrors to their
mirror. original positions.
1- Up
Do not use this mirror to estimate distance After turning the ignition switch to the
2- Down
of following vehicles when changing lanes. “LOCK” position or putting the operation
3- Right
mode in OFF, it is possible to retract and
4- Left
extend the mirrors using the mirror retractor
5- Mirror retractor switch
Electric remote-controlled outside switch for approximately 30 seconds.
rear-view mirrors 3. After completing the adjustment, return
the switch (A) to the centre position.
The outside rear-view mirrors can be oper-
ated when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “ACC” position or the operation mode is Retracting and extending the
put in ON or ACC. outside mirrors
E00601102676
1. Push the switch (A) to the same side as The outside mirror can be retracted in
the mirror whose adjustment is desired. towards the side window to prevent damage
when parking in narrow areas.

6-8 Starting and driving

 Outside rear-view mirrors
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-4.
NOTE Refer to “Keyless operation system: To oper-
 If you move a mirror by hand or it moves
ate using the keyless operation function” on
after hitting a person or object, you may not
page 3-9.
be able to return it to its original position
using the mirror retractor switch. If this hap-
pens, push the mirror retractor switch to NOTE
place the mirror in its retracted position and  Functions can be modified as stated below.
then push the switch again to return the mir- Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
ror to its original position. MOTORS dealer.
 When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
to operate as intended, please refrain from
• Automatically extend when the driver’s 6
door is closed and the ignition switch is
repeated pushing of the retractor switch as turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
CAUTION this action can result in burn-out of the mir- tion mode is put in ON.
 It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors ror motor circuits. In addition, automatically retract when the
by hand. After retracting a mirror using the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” or
mirror retractor switch, however, you should Retracting and extending the mir- “ACC” position or the operation mode is
extend it by using the switch again, not by put in OFF or ACC, and the driver’s door is
hand. If you extended the mirror by hand rors without using the mirror then opened.
after retracting it using the switch, it would retractor switch • Automatically extend when the vehicle
not properly lock in position. As a result, the speed reaches approximately 30 km/h.
mirror could move because of the wind or [Except for vehicles equipped with keyless • Deactivate the automatic extension func-
vibration while you are driving, and this may tion.
operation system]
prevent the driver’s rearward visibility.
The mirrors automatically retract or extend
when the doors and tailgate are locked or
unlocked using the key switches of the key-
NOTE
less entry system.
 Be careful not to get your hands trapped
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-4.
while a mirror is moving.
[Vehicles with the keyless operation system]
The mirrors automatically retract or extend
when the doors and tailgate are locked or
unlocked using the key switches or the key-
less operation function of the keyless opera-
tion system.

Starting and driving 6-9

 Ignition switch*

NOTE LOCK NOTE

The outside rear-view mirrors can be  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
retracted or extended by the following opera- The engine is stopped and the steering wheel immobilizer.
tions, even if changing to the any of above. To start the engine, the ID code which the
locked. The key can only be inserted and
After pressing the LOCK switch on the key transponder inside the key sends must match
removed in this position.
to lock the doors and tailgate, if the LOCK the one registered in the immobilizer com-
switch is pressed again twice in a row within puter.
approximately 30 seconds, the outside rear- ACC Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
view mirrors will retract. starting system)” on page 3-3.
6 After pressing the UNLOCK switch on the
key to unlock the doors and tailgate, if the The engine is stopped, but the audio system
UNLOCK switch is pressed again twice in a and other electric devices can be operated.
row within approximately 30 seconds, the
To remove the key
E00620401727
outside rear-view mirrors will extend again.
ON When removing the key, first set the selector
lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and push
Ignition switch* All the vehicle’s electrical devices can be the key in at the “ACC” position and keep it
E00601403432 operated. depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK”
position, and remove it.
START

The starter motor operates. After the engine

has started, release the key and it will auto-
matically return to the “ON” position.

6-10 Starting and driving

 Engine switch*

CAUTION NOTE
 Do not remove the ignition key from the  When the battery in the keyless operation
ignition switch while driving. The steering key has worn out, or the keyless operation
wheel will be locked, causing loss of control. key is out of the vehicle, warning display
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the will appear.
brake servomechanism will cease to function Warning display (when the engine switch is
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, pressed 1 time)
the power steering system will not function
and it will require greater manual effort to
operate the steering. 6
 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
a long time when the engine is not running,
doing so will cause the battery to be dis- CAUTION Warning display (when the engine switch is
charged.  The indicator lamp (A) will flash orange pressed 2 times or more)
 Do not turn the key to the “START” position when there is a problem or malfunction in
while the engine is running. Doing so could the keyless operation system. Never drive if
damage the starter motor. the indicator lamp on the engine switch is
flashing orange. Immediately contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
 If the engine switch operation is not smooth
Engine switch* and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
E00631801822
switch. Immediately contact an authorised Operation mode of the engine
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. switch and its function
In order to prevent theft, the engine will not
start unless a preregistered keyless operation
key is used. (Engine immobilizer function)
If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
NOTE OFF
 When operating the engine switch, press the
you can start the engine. The indicator lamp on the engine switch turns
switch all the way in. If the switch is not
fully pressed, the engine may not start or the off.
operation mode may not change. If the The operation mode cannot be put in OFF
engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no when the selector lever is in any position
need to hold the engine switch down. other than the “P” (PARK) position.

Starting and driving 6-11

 Engine switch*

ACC CAUTION
 The operation mode cannot be changed from
Electrical devices such as the audio and OFF to ACC or ON if the keyless operation
accessory socket can be operated. key is not detected to be in the vehicle. Refer
The indicator lamp on the engine switch illu- to “Keyless operation system: Operating
minates orange. range for starting the engine and changing
the operation mode” on page 3-9.
ON  When there is the keyless operation key in
the vehicle and the operation mode isn’t
6 All vehicle’s electrical devices can be oper- change, the keyless operation key battery
may have worn out.
ated.
The indicator lamp on the engine switch illu-
minates green. The indicator lamp turns off CAUTION
when the engine is running.  When the engine is not running, put the oper- NOTE
ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation  If the operation mode cannot be changed to
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when OFF, perform the following procedure.
NOTE the engine is not running may cause the bat- 1. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic tery to be discharged, making it impossible position, and then change the operation
immobilizer. to start the engine, lock and unlock the steer- mode to OFF.
To start the engine, the ID code which the ing wheel. 2. One of the other causes could be low battery
transponder inside the key sends must match  When the battery is disconnected, the current voltage. If this occurs, the keyless entry sys-
the one registered in the immobilizer com- operation mode is memorized. After recon- tem, keyless operation function, and steering
puter. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer necting the battery, the memorized mode is lock will also not operate. Contact an author-
(Anti-theft starting system)” on page 3-3. selected automatically. Before disconnect- ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
Changing the operation mode tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery ACC power auto-cutout func-
E00631901692
is run down. tion
If you press the engine switch without E00632801744
depressing the brake pedal, you can change
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed
the operation mode in the order of OFF, ACC,
with the operation mode in ACC, the function
ON, OFF.
automatically cuts out the power for the audio

6-12 Starting and driving

 Steering wheel lock
system and other electric devices that can be When the operation mode is in any mode
operated with that position. {only that other than OFF, if you try to lock the doors Steering wheel lock
driver’s door has closed and the selector lever and the tailgate by pressing the driver’s or E00601502508

in the “P” (PARK) position} front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, or Except for vehicles equipped with the
When you open driver’s door or the engine the tailgate lock/unlock switch, warning dis- keyless operation system
switch operate again, the power is supplied play will appear and the outer buzzer will
again. sound and you cannot lock the doors.
To lock
NOTE Operation mode ON reminder
 When the ACC power is automatically cut system
Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
6
out, you cannot lock the steering wheel and
E00632301185
you cannot lock and unlock the doors using
If the driver’s door is opened with the engine
the keyless entry system or keyless operation To unlock
function. stopped and the operation mode in any mode
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: other than OFF, the operation mode ON
• The time until the power cuts out can be reminder inner buzzer sounds intermittently Turn the key to the “ACC” position while
changed to approximately 60 minutes. to remind you to put the operation mode in moving the steering wheel slightly right and
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can OFF. left.
be deactivated.
For details, consult an authorised Warning display
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

Operation mode OFF reminder

system
E00632201692

Warning display

Starting and driving 6-13

 Steering wheel lock

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 Remove the key when leaving the vehicle. • Lock all the doors and the tailgate with the  When the steering wheel does not unlock,
In some countries, it is prohibited to leave keyless entry system or the keyless opera- the warning display will appear and the inner
the key on the vehicle when parked. tion system function. buzzer will sound. Press the engine switch
 When the driver’s door is opened while the again while moving the steering wheel
For vehicles equipped with the keyless steering wheel does not lock, warning dis- slightly right and left.
operation system play will appear and the inner buzzer sounds
to alert the steering wheel is unlocked. Warning display

6 To lock
After pressing the engine switch and opera-
tion mode in OFF, when driver’s door is
 If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock
opened, the steering wheel is locked.
and the steering wheel cannot be locked, the
To unlock warning display will appear and the inner
CAUTION buzzer will sound. Change the operation
 If the engine is stopped while driving, do not The following methods can be used to unlock mode from ON to OFF and trying to lock the
open a door or press the LOCK switch on the steering wheel again. If the warning display
the steering wheel.
key until the vehicle stops in a safe place. appears again, have your vehicle checked at
This could cause the steering wheel to lock,  Put the operation mode in ACC. an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
making it impossible to operate the vehicle. dealer.
 Start the engine.
Warning display

NOTE CAUTION
 When the following operation is performed  Carry the key with you when leaving the
with the operation mode in OFF and the vehicle.
selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position,  If your vehicle needs to be towed, unlock the
the steering wheel is locked. steering wheel.
• Open or close the driver’s door. Refer to “Towing: Emergency towing” on
page 8-13.
• Close all the doors and the tailgate.
• Open one of the doors or the tailgate when
all the doors and the tailgate are closed.

6-14 Starting and driving

 Starting and stopping the engine

NOTE Starting and stopping the CAUTION

 If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock,
the warning display will appear and the inner
engine  Do not run the engine at high speeds or drive
the vehicle at high speeds until the engine
E00620601628
buzzer will sound. Immediately stop the has had a chance to warm up.
vehicle in a safe place and contact the near-  Release the ignition key as soon as the
est authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS Tips for starting engine starts to avoid damaging the starter
dealer. motor.

Warning display Except for vehicles equipped with the For vehicles equipped with the keyless
keyless operation system operation system 6
 Do not operate the starter motor continu-  The operation mode can be in any mode
ously longer than 10 seconds; doing so to start the engine.
could run down the battery. If the engine  The starter motor will be turning for up to
does not start, turn the ignition switch approximately 15 seconds if the engine
back to “LOCK”, wait a few seconds, and switch is released at once. Pressing the
then try again. Trying repeatedly with the engine switch again while the starter
starter motor still turning will damage the motor is still turning will stop the starter
starter mechanism. motor. The starter motor will be turning
for up to approximately 30 seconds while
WARNING the engine switch is pressed.
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly If the engine does not start, wait for a
ventilated area any longer than is needed while and then attempt to start the engine
to move your vehicle in or out of the area. again. Trying repeatedly with the starter
Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and motor still turning will damage the starter
can be fatal. mechanism.

CAUTION
 Never attempt to start the engine by pushing
or pulling the vehicle.

Starting and driving 6-15

 Starting and stopping the engine

WARNING NOTE
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
ventilated area any longer than is needed up. These will disappear as the engine warms
to move your vehicle in or out of the area. up.
Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and
can be fatal.
When the engine is hard to start
CAUTION After several attempts, you may experience
6  Never attempt to start the engine by pushing
that the engine still does not start.
or pulling the vehicle.
 Do not run the engine at high speeds or drive
the vehicle at high speeds until the engine
NOTE 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
 The starter will not operate unless the selec- as lamps, air conditioning blower and rear
has had a chance to warm up.
tor lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU- window demister, are turned off.
TRAL) position. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, press
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
Starting the engine (PARK) position so that the wheels are there, then crank the engine. Release the
E00620702192 locked. accelerator pedal, immediately after the
Except for vehicles equipped with the engine starts.
keyless operation system 5. After turning the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, make certain that all
The starting procedure is as follows: warning lamps are functioning properly
before starting the engine.
1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat 6. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
belt. position without depressing the accelera-
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. tor pedal, and release it when the engine
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal. starts.
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position.

6-16 Starting and driving

 Starting and stopping the engine
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
could be flooded with too much petrol.
NOTE NOTE
 When the engine is not started, it may  When starting the engine, the selector lever
While depressing the brake pedal, press
become hard to depress the brake pedal and is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) or
the accelerator pedal all the way down
the vehicle may not be able to detect the the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you
and hold it there, then crank the engine for pedal operation. pressed the engine switch without depressing
5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch Therefore the engine may not be started. In the brake pedal, warning display will appear.
to the “LOCK” position and release the such a case, depress the brake pedal more
accelerator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and firmly than usual. Warning display
then crank the engine again for 5 to 6 sec-
onds while depressing the brake pedal, 4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” 6
but do not press the accelerator pedal. (PARK) position.
Release the ignition switch if the engine
starts. If the engine fails to start, repeat
these procedures. If the engine still will
not start, contact an authorised When the engine is hard to start
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
After several attempts, you may experience
For vehicles equipped with the keyless that the engine still does not start.
operation system
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
The starting procedure is as follows: as lamps, air conditioning blower and rear
window demister, are turned off.
1. Fasten the seat belt. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, press
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 5. Press the engine switch.
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down 6. Make certain that all warning lamps are
there, then crank the engine. Release the
firmly with your right foot. functioning properly.
accelerator pedal, immediately after the
engine starts.
NOTE
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
up.

Starting and driving 6-17

 Starting and stopping the engine
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine 2. Firmly apply the parking brake while
For vehicles equipped with the keyless
could be flooded with too much petrol. depressing the brake pedal.
operation system
While depressing the brake pedal, press 3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
the accelerator pedal all the way down (PARK) position, press the engine switch
and hold it there, then press the engine WARNING to stop the engine.
switch to crank the engine. If the engine  Do not operate the engine switch while
does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, press driving except in an emergency. If the
the engine switch to stop the engine, and engine is stopped while driving, the brake If the keyless operation key is
release the accelerator pedal. Put the oper-
servomechanism will cease to function and not operating properly
braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
6 ation mode in OFF. Wait a few seconds, the power steering system will not func-
E00632901455

and then press the engine switch to crank tion and it will require greater manual The following operation can be used to start
the engine again while depressing the effort to operate the steering. This could the engine or change the operation mode.
brake pedal, but do not press the accelera- result in a serious accident.
tor pedal. If the engine fails to start, repeat 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with your
these procedures. If the engine still will right foot.
not start, contact an authorised NOTE 2. While depressing the brake pedal, touch
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.  If you have to bring the engine to an emer- the portion of the keyless operation key
gency stop while driving, press and hold the shown in the illustration to the engine
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press switch.
Stopping the engine it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will
E00620801633 stop and the operation mode will go to ACC.
 Do not stop the engine with the selector lever
Except for vehicles equipped with the
in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
keyless operation system
position. If the engine is stopped with the
selector lever in any position other than the
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
“P” (PARK) position, the operation mode
2. Firmly apply the parking brake while
will go to ACC rather than OFF.
depressing the brake pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
3. Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
position, and stop the engine. tion.

1. Stop the vehicle.

6-18 Starting and driving

BK0286700EN.book 19 ページ ２０１９年８月７日　水曜日　午後１時２６分

4-speed automatic transmission

3. If the keyless operation key is recognized,
the indication lamp on the engine switch 4-speed automatic transmis-
illuminates in green, and then the engine sion
can be started and the operation mode can E00603202192

be changed within approximately 10 sec-

onds. Refer to “Starting the engine” on NOTE
page 6-16 and “Changing the operation  During running-in period or immediately
mode” on 6-12. after reconnection of the battery cable, there
may be a case where gear shifts are not made
smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty
NOTE transmission. 6
 If metal objects or other keys are near the Gear shifts will become smooth after the
keyless operation key, the keyless operation transmission has been shifted several times
key may not be recognized. by the electronic control system.
 Instead of depressing the brake pedal, the
keyless operation key can also be recognized
in the same way within approximately Selector lever operation
30 seconds after pushing the engine switch.
E00603302353
 To change the operation mode without start-
ing the engine, release the brake pedal after The transmission has 4 forward gears and
the indication lamp on the engine switch illu- 1 reverse gear.
minates in green, and then press the engine The individual gears are selected automati-
switch. cally, depending on the speed of the vehicle
and the position of the accelerator pedal.
The selector lever has 6 positions, and is The lock button must be pressed
equipped with a lock button (A) to avoid while the brake pedal is depressed to
inadvertent selection of the wrong gear. move the selector lever.
The lock button must be pressed to
move the selector lever.
The lock button need not be pressed
to move the selector lever.

Starting and driving 6-19

 4-speed automatic transmission

WARNING When the selector lever cannot

 If the lock button is always pressed to be shifted from the “P” (PARK)
operate the selector lever, the selector
lever may be accidentally shifted into the position
“P” (PARK), “R” (REVERSE), “2” (SEC- E00694800026

OND) or “L” (LOW) position. Be sure not When the selector lever cannot be shifted
to press the lock button when performing from the “P” (PARK) position to another
the operations indicated by in the illus- position while the brake pedal is pressed and
tration. held down with the ignition switch at the
6  Always depress the brake pedal when “ON” position or the operation mode in ON,
shifting the selector lever into a gear from the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- anism may be malfunctioning. Immediately
tion.
have your vehicle checked by an authorised Selector lever position indicator
Never put your foot on the accelerator
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
pedal while shifting the selector lever from
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
display
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- E00603502065
tion. selector lever as follows.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
applied. ON, the position of the selector lever is indi-
NOTE
2. Stop the engine if it is running. cated in the multi-information display.
 To avoid erroneous operation, move the
selector lever firmly into each position and
3. Depress the brake pedal with the right
briefly hold it there. Always check the posi- foot.
Vehicles equipped with the mono-tone LCD
tion shown by the selector lever position dis- 4. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
play after moving the selector lever. driver straight into the shift-lock release
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, hole (A).
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
selector lever from being moved from the TRAL) position while pressing the
“P” (PARK) position. straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
down.

6-20 Starting and driving

 4-speed automatic transmission

Vehicles equipped with the TFT colour LCD “N” NEUTRAL CAUTION
 To prevent transmission damage, never shift
At this position the transmission is disen- into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
a M/T, and should only be used when the motion.
vehicle is stationary for an extended length of
time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.
“2” SECOND
WARNING 6
This position is for extra power when driving
 Never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving. A up moderately steep hills, and for engine
serious accident could occur since you braking when descending moderately steep
Selector lever positions could accidentally move the lever into the gradients.
E00603801960 “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position
or you will lose engine braking.
“L” LOW
“P” PARK  On a gradient, the engine should be
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. This position is for driving up very steep hills
This position locks the transmission to pre-  To prevent rolling, always keep your foot and for engine braking at low speeds when
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in driving down steep hills.
be started in this position. “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
tion.
WARNING
“R” REVERSE  This position can be used for maximum
engine braking.
This position is to back up. Be very careful not to shift into “L”
“D” DRIVE (LOW) position suddenly.
Sudden engine braking may cause the
CAUTION This position is for normal driving. The trans- tyres to skid.
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” mission automatically selects a suitable gear Select this position according to the road
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in conditions and vehicle speed.
for your speed and acceleration.
motion to avoid a transmission damage.

Starting and driving 6-21

 4-speed automatic transmission

NOTE
 The A/T has a control function that prevents
over-revving. As a result, it may not perform
a shift when the selector lever is moved from
the “D” (DRIVE) position to the “2” (SEC-
OND) position or from the “2” (SECOND)
position to the “L” (LOW) position.

6 Overdrive control switch

E00604001129

The overdrive control switch can be used Vehicles equipped with the TFT colour
while the selector lever is in the “D” Overdrive OFF indicator LCD
(DRIVE) position. lamp/overdrive OFF indicator
E00614601056 When the overdrive control switch is in the
During normal driving OFF position, the overdrive OFF indicator
Vehicles equipped with the mono-tone appears on the multi-information display.
LCD
Press the overdrive control switch to turn the
overdrive function on. The transmission will When the overdrive control switch is in the
shift automatically among the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, OFF position, the overdrive OFF indicator
and 4th gears, enabling fuel-efficient, eco- lamp in the meter cluster comes on.
nomical driving.

During hilly roads driving

Press the overdrive control switch to turn the

overdrive function off. The transmission will
shift automatically among the 1st, 2nd, and
3rd gears, and light engine braking will be
available on downhill roads.

6-22 Starting and driving

 4-speed automatic transmission

When a malfunction occurs in NOTE  When the warning display is dis-

the A/T  “A” indicator does blink only the condition played on
E00615101579
that the A/T position switch is broken.
It does not indicate in normal driving condi-
tion. NOTE
Vehicles equipped with the mono-  The buzzer may sounds at the time of
tone LCD warning display appears.
E00660800061 CAUTION
 If the selector lever position display blinks
 When the selector lever position while you are driving, it is likely that a safety CAUTION 6
display blinks device is operating because of a malfunction  If malfunction occurs in the A/T while driv-
E00660900075 in the A/T. Immediately have the vehicle
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI ing, the warning display appears on the
When the selector lever position display information screen in the multi-information
MOTORS dealer.
blinks while you are driving, there could be a display.
malfunction in the A/T system or A/T fluid In this case, immediately park your vehicle
temperature becomes abnormally high. in a safe place and follow these procedures:
Vehicles equipped with the TFT
colour LCD The A/T fluid is overheating. The engine
E00661100090 control may activate to lower the A/T fluid
There could be a system malfunction if the temperature, causing the engine revolutions
and vehicle speed to decrease, or the gear
warning display or the warning display shift timing may change by activating the
is displayed on the information screen in the A/T control. In this case, take one of the fol-
multi-information display. lowing procedures.
• Slow down your vehicle.
or • Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the
, , , selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position,
and open the bonnet with the engine run-
ning to allow the engine to cool down.
or
,

Starting and driving 6-23

 4-speed automatic transmission

CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

After a while, confirm that the warning It may be that there is something unusual  Use the selector lever in the correct shift
happening in the A/T, causing a safety position in accordance with driving condi-
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
device to activate. Immediately have your tions.
continue driving if the display is no longer
vehicle inspected by an authorised Never coast downhill backward with the
showing. If the warning display remains,
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. selector lever in the {“D” (DRIVE), “2”
contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
(SECOND) or “L” (LOW)} or coast forward
MOTORS dealer immediately.
with the selector lever in the “R”
Operation of the A/T (REVERSE) position.
 When the warning display is dis-
6 played on
E00604201831 The engine may stop and the unexpected
increase in brake pedal effort and steering
CAUTION wheel weight could lead to an accident.
 Before selecting a gear with the engine run-  Do not race the engine with brake pedal
NOTE ning and the vehicle stationary, fully depress pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
 The selector lever position display blinks at the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from This can damage the A/T.
creeping. Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
the time of warning display appears.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the while holding down the brake pedal with the
 The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi- gear is engaged, especially when the engine selector lever in the “P” (PARK), “N” (NEU-
tion display will blink only when there is a speed is high, at fast idle or with the air con- TRAL), “D” (DRIVE), “2” (SECOND) or
problem with the A/T position switch. ditioner operating, the brakes should only be “L” (LOW) position, the engine revolutions
It is not seen during normal driving. released when you are ready to drive away. may not rise as high as when performing the
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at same operation with the selector lever in the
all times. “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
CAUTION Using the left foot could cause driver move-
 If malfunction occurs in the A/T while driv- ment delay in case of an emergency.
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never race
Passing acceleration
ing, the warning display appears on the E00604501397
the engine when shifting from the “P”
information screen in the multi-information
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)
display.
In this case, immediately park your vehicle
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the position, press the accelerator to the floor.
in a safe place and follow these procedures:
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will The A/T will automatically downshift.
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
mature wear of brake pads.

6-24 Starting and driving

 Braking
2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level
Waiting NOTE road, move the selector lever back to “D”
E00604601415  On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
(DRIVE).
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic brake before moving the selector lever to the
signals the vehicle can be left in gear and held “P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-
tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before NOTE
stationary with the service brake.  When the selector lever position display in
applying the parking brake, it may be diffi-
For longer waiting periods with the engine the instrument panel blinks, it means that
cult to disengage the selector lever from the
running, place the selector lever in the “N” “P” (PARK) position when next you drive there is an abnormal condition in the trans-
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking the vehicle, requiring application of a strong mission.
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary Refer to “When the selector lever position
with the service brake.
force to the selector lever to move from the
“P” (PARK) position. display blinks” on page 6-23. 6

CAUTION
 Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill When the A/T makes no speed Braking
using the accelerator pedal (without using change E00607003225

the brake pedal). Always apply the parking E00604802036 All the parts of the brake system are critical
brake and/or service brakes.
If the transmission does not change speeds to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
while driving, or your vehicle does not pick authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer at
up enough speed when starting on an uphill regular intervals according to the service
Parking slope, it may be that there is something unu- booklet.
E00604701357
sual happening in the transmission, causing a
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- safety device to activate. Immediately have CAUTION
plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake, your vehicle checked at an authorised  Avoid driving habits that cause heavy brak-
and then move the selector lever to the “P” MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. ing and never “ride” the brakes by resting
(PARK) position. your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
If you are going to leave the vehicle unat- 1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving It causes brake overheating and fade.
tended, always switch off the engine and uphill, shift the selector lever into 2nd
carry the key. gear. This method might not work
depending on the transmission malfunc-
Brake system
tion.

The service brake is divided into two brake

circuits. And your vehicle is equipped with
Starting and driving 6-25
 Hill start assist
power brakes. If one brake circuit fails, the
other is available to stop the vehicle. If your
When brakes are wet Brake pad
vehicle should lose the power assist for some  Avoid hard braking situations.
reason, the brakes will still work. In these sit- Check the brake system while driving at a
New brakes need to be broken-in by mod-
uations, even if the brake pedal moves down low speed immediately after starting, espe-
erate use for the first 200 km.
to the very end of its possible stroke or resists cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
 The disc brakes are provided with a warn-
being depressed, keep depressing the brake they work normally.
ing device which emits a shrieking metal-
pedal down harder and further than usual; A film of water can be formed on the brake
lic sound while braking if the brake pads
stop driving as soon as possible and have the discs and drums and prevent normal braking
have reached their limit. If you hear this
after driving in heavy rain or through large
6 brake system repaired.
puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. If this
sound, have the brake pads replaced
immediately.
occurs, dry the brakes out by driving slowly
WARNING while lightly depressing the brake pedal.
 Do not turn off the engine while your vehi- WARNING
cle is in motion. If you turn off the engine  Driving with worn brake pads will make it
while driving, the power assistance for the When driving downhill harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
braking system will stop working and
your brakes will not work effectively.
It is important to take advantage of the engine
 If the power assist is lost or if either brake
hydraulic system stops working properly,
braking by shifting to a lower shift position Hill start assist
take your vehicle to an authorised while driving on steep downhill roads in E00628001527

MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer immedi- order to prevent the brakes from overheating. The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
ately. on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
WARNING vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
 Do not leave any objects near the brake braking force for approximately 2 seconds
Warning display pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; when you move your foot from the brake
doing so could prevent the full pedal pedal to the accelerator pedal.
stroke that would be necessary in an
The brake warning lamp illuminates to indi-
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
cate a fault in the braking system. A warning be operated freely at all times. Make sure
is also displayed on the multi-information the floor mat is securely held in place.
display. Refer to “Brake warning lamp” and
“Brake warning display” on page 5-34, 5-36.

6-26 Starting and driving

 Hill start assist

CAUTION NOTE Warning lamp/display

 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the E00628201646

prevent backwards movement of the vehicle. selector lever into the “R” (REVERSE) posi- If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
Under certain circumstances, even when hill tion. tem, the following warning lamp/display will
start assist is activated, the vehicle may be shown.
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily 3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start Warning lamp
loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip- assist will maintain the braking force
pery. applied while stopped for approximately 2
 The hill start assist is not designed to keep
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
seconds.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill Warning display
6
for more than 2 seconds. start assist will gradually decrease the
 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position
as an alternative to depressing the brake
pedal. NOTE
Doing so could cause an accident.  The hill start assist is activated when all of
 Do not turn the operation mode in ACC or the following conditions are met.
OFF while the hill start assist is operating. • The engine is running.
CAUTION
The hill start assist could stop operating, (The hill start assist will not be activated  If the warning is displayed, the hill start
which could result in an accident. while the engine is starting or immediately assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
after the engine is started.)  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
• The selector lever is in any position other engine.
Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
To operate than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
play/indicator goes out, in which case the hill
• The vehicle is completely stationary, with
E00628101603
the brake pedal depressed. start assist is again working normally.
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the If they remain displayed or reappear fre-
• The parking brake is released.
brake pedal. quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle
 The hill start assist will not operate if the
2. Place the selector lever into the “D” immediately, but the vehicle should be
accelerator pedal is depressed before the
(DRIVE) position. inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI
brake pedal is released.
MOTORS dealer.
 The hill start assist also operates when
reversing on an uphill slope.

Starting and driving 6-27

 Brake assist system

Brake assist system NOTE CAUTION

E00627001979  When the brake assist system is in use while  If the ABS warning or ASC warning is dis-
driving, you may feel as if the depressed played, the emergency stop signal system
The brake assist system is a device assisting
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small may not operate.
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal motions in conjunction with the operation Refer to “ABS warning lamp/display” on
firmly such as in emergency stop situations noise, or the vehicle body and the steering page 6-30.
and provides greater braking force. wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake Refer to “ASC warning lamp/display” on
assist system is operating normally and does page 6-34.
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
brakes will be applied with more force than
6 usual.
depress the brake pedal.
 When the anti-lock brake system warning NOTE
lamp or only active stability control warning  [Activating condition for the emergency stop
CAUTION lamp illuminate, the brake assist system in signal system]
not functioning. It activates when all of the following condi-
 The brake assist system is not a device
designed to exercise braking force greater tions are met.
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a Emergency stop signal sys- • The vehicle speed is approximately 55
sufficient distance between your vehicle and km/h or higher.
a vehicle in front of you without relying too tem • The brake pedal has been depressed, and
much on the brake assist system. E00626001350 the system judges that it was sudden brak-
This is a device that reduces the possibility of ing from the vehicle deceleration and the
rear end collisions by the rapid and automatic operating condition of the anti-lock brake
NOTE blinking of the hazard warning lamps to alert
system (ABS).
 Once the brake assist system is operational, [Deactivating condition for the emergency
vehicles approaching from behind during
it maintains great braking force even if the stop signal system]
sudden braking. When the emergency stop It deactivates when one of the following con-
brake pedal is lightly released. signal system operates, the hazard warning
To stop its operation, completely remove ditions is met.
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster • The brake pedal is released.
your foot from the brake pedal.
blinks rapidly at the same time. • The hazard warning flasher switch is
pressed.
• The system judges that it was not sudden
braking from the vehicle deceleration and
the operating condition of the anti-lock
brake system (ABS).

6-28 Starting and driving

 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
• Driving on bumpy roads or other poor This pulsation is due to the self-diagnosis
Anti-lock brake system driving surfaces. operation of the ABS and does not indi-
(ABS)  Operation of ABS is not restricted to situ- cate a malfunction.
E00607102766 ations where brakes are applied suddenly.  The ABS becomes operative after the
Environmental conditions can have an effect This system may also operate to prevent vehicle has accelerated to a speed in
on braking. During sudden braking when wheel lock when you are driving over excess of approximately 10 km/h. It stops
there is snow, ice, oil, water etc. on the road manholes, steel road-work plates, or the operating when the vehicle decelerates to
surface, a skid may occur. In this situation, vehicle is driven over steps or level differ- a speed below approximately 5 km/h.
steering control and braking effectiveness is ences in the road, road markings, or other
reduced and the stopping distance is surfaces which are difficult for the wheels
CAUTION 6
increased. The vehicle may also go into an to grip.
 Even the ABS cannot prevent the natural
uncontrolled spin.  When the ABS is activated, you may feel
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. It
The ABS helps prevent the wheels from lock- the brake pedal pulsation and the vibra- cannot for instance avoid accidents that may
ing during braking, thus maintaining direc- tions of the vehicle body and steering result from excessive speed on bends or fol-
tional stability, ensuring controllability and wheel. You may also hear a characteristic lowing another vehicle too closely or aqua-
providing optimum braking force. noise. At this time, you may feel as if the planing. It should remain the driver’s task to
pedal attempts to resist being depressed. observe safety precautions to judge speeds
This is a normal result of the ABS opera- and brake applications correctly in such con-
Operating hints tion, and does not indicate a problem. ditions.
If this situation occurs, depress the  Be sure to use tyres of the same type and size
 Always maintain the same distance from brake pedal more firmly in order to on 4 wheels.
the vehicle in front of you as you would operate the ABS. Do not pump the If tyre types or sizes are mixed, ABS may
for a vehicle not equipped with ABS. brake. This will result in reduced brak-
not function normally.
Compared with vehicles not fitted with ing performance.
 Never install a limited slip differential,
ABS, your vehicle may require a longer which is not MITSUBISHI MOTORS GEN-
 You will hear the operation sound of the UINE parts, as the ABS may not function
stopping distance in the following cases: motor coming from the engine compart-
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered normally.
ment immediately following start off after We recommend you to consult an authorised
roads. starting the engine. If the brake pedal is MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• Driving with tyre chains installed. depressed at that moment, a brake pedal
• Driving on roads where the road surface pulsating is felt.
is pitted or has other differences in sur-
face height.

Starting and driving 6-29

 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS warning lamp / display CAUTION If the ABS warning lamp/display

E00607202682 • When the ignition switch is in the “ON” and brake warning lamp/display
Warning lamp position or the operation mode is put in ON, illuminate at the same time
the warning lamp does not come on or it
remains on and does not go off
• The warning lamp comes on while driving Warning lamp
• The warning display appears while driving
Warning display

6 If the warning lamp/display Warning display

illuminate while driving
E00607302566

If only the ABS warning lamp/dis-

If there is a malfunction in the system, the
play illuminate
ABS warning lamp will come on and the
warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display. Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
lamp only comes on when the ignition switch Restart the engine and check to see whether
is turned to the “ON” position or the opera- the lamp goes out after a few minutes driving;
if it then remains off during driving, there is The ABS and brake force distribution func-
tion mode is put in ON and goes off a few
no problem. tion may not work, so hard braking could
seconds later.
However, if the lamp does not go out, or if it make the vehicle unstable.
lights up again when the vehicle is driven, we Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
CAUTION recommend you to have the vehicle checked Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately
 Any of the following warning lamp/display as soon as possible. and contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
behaviour indicates that the ABS is not func- MOTORS dealer.
tioning and only the standard brake system is
working. (The standard brake system is func-
tioning normally.) If this happens, take your
vehicle to an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.

6-30 Starting and driving

 Electric power steering system (EPS)

NOTE Electric power steering sys- NOTE

 The ABS warning lamp and brake warning
lamp illuminate at the same time and the
tem (EPS)  During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering wheel (for example, while you are
E00629201496
warning displays appear alternately on the manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
information screen in the multi-information The power steering system operates while the space), a protection function may be acti-
display. engine is running. vated to prevent overheating of the power
It helps reduce the effort needed to turn the steering system. This function will make the
steering wheel. steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
this event, limit your turning of the steering
After driving on icy roads The power steering system has mechanical
E00618801362 steering capability in case the power assist is
wheel for a while. When the system has
cooled down, the steering effort will return
6
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea- to normal.
any snow and ice which may have be left son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-  If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
around the wheels. When doing this, be care- cle, but you will notice it takes much more cle is stationary with the headlamps on, the
ful not to damage the wheel speed sensors effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi- headlamps may become dim. This behaviour
(A) or the cables located at each wheel. cle inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI is not abnormal. The headlamps will return
MOTORS dealer. to their original brightness after a short
while.
Front Rear
WARNING
 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
moving. Stopping the engine would make Electric power steering system
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn, warning lamp/warning display
possibly resulting in an accident.
Warning lamp

Starting and driving 6-31

 Active stability control (ASC)
Warning display tion control function and stability control
function to help maintain the vehicle’s control
NOTE
 An operation noise may be emitted from the
and traction. Please read this section in con-
engine compartment in the following situa-
junction with the page on the anti-lock brake
tions. The sound is associated with checking
system, traction control function and stability the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
control function. may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
If there is a malfunction in the system, the Anti-lock brake system (ABS)  P.6-29 tion.
warning lamp will come on and the warning Traction control function  P.6-32 • When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
display will appear on the information screen Stability control function  P.6-33
6 in the multi-information display.
position or the operation mode is put in ON.
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after
Under normal conditions, the warning lamp
comes on when the ignition switch is turned
CAUTION the engine is turned on.
 Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC  When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
to the “ON” position or the operation mode is vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
put in ON, and goes off after the engine has from acting on the vehicle. ing sound from the engine compartment.
started. This system, like any other system, has lim- This indicates that the system is operating
its and cannot help you to maintain traction normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
 When the anti-lock brake system warning
CAUTION and control of the vehicle in all circum-
lamp is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
stances. Reckless driving can lead to acci-
 If the warning lamp comes on and the warn-
dents. It is the driver’s responsibility to drive
ing display appears while the engine is run-
carefully. This means into account the traffic,
ning, have the vehicle inspected by an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
road and environmental conditions. Traction control function
as soon as possible.  Be sure to use the same specified type and E00619001185

It may become harder to turn the steering size of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the
ASC may not work properly. On slippery surfaces, the traction control
wheel.
 Do not install any aftermarket limited slip function prevents the drive wheels from spin-
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to
may stop functioning properly. start moving from a stopped condition. It also
Active stability control provides sufficient driving force and steering
(ASC) performance as the vehicle turns while press-
E00616701963
ing the acceleration pedal.
The active stability control (ASC) takes over-
all control of the anti-lock brake system, trac-

6-32 Starting and driving

 Active stability control (ASC)

CAUTION ASC operation indicator or

 When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy ASC OFF indicator
road, be sure to install snow tyres and drive E00619301872
the vehicle at moderate speeds.
ASC operation indicator
-
The indicator will blink when the
ASC is operating.
Stability control function
ASC OFF indicator
E00619101144 -
This indicator will turn on when the
The stability control function is designed to
help the driver maintain control of the vehicle
ASC is turned off with the ASC OFF 6
switch.
on slippery roads or during rapid steering
maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine CAUTION
output and the brake on each wheel.  For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch
should be operated when your vehicle is
CAUTION
stopped.  When indicator blinks, ASC is operating,
NOTE  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in which means that the road is slippery or that
 The stability control function operates at normal circumstances. your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip.
speeds of approximately 15 km/h or higher. If this happens, drive slower with less accel-
erator input.
NOTE
ASC OFF switch  When moving out of mud, sand or fresh
E00619201930 snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
The ASC is automatically activated when the allow the engine speed to increase. In such
operation mode is put in ON. You can deacti- situations, temporarily turning off the ASC
vate the system by pressing down the ASC with the ASC OFF switch will make it easier
to move out your vehicle.
OFF switch for 3 seconds or longer.
 Using the ASC OFF switch turns off both the
When the ASC is deactivated, the indica- stability control function and the traction
tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC, control function.
momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; the  If you continue to press the ASC OFF switch
after the ASC is turned off, the “mistaken
indicator is turned off.
operation protection function” will activate
and the ASC will turn back on.

Starting and driving 6-33

 Cruise control*
Warning lamp
CAUTION CAUTION
 If the temperature in the braking system con-  When towing the vehicle with only the front
tinues to increase due to continuous brake - ASC operation indicator wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the
control on a slippery road surface, the ground, do not place the ignition switch in
- ASC OFF indicator the “ON” position or do not put the operation
indicator will blink.
mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in
To prevent the brake system from overheat-
Warning display the “ON” position or putting the operation
ing, the brake control of the traction control
mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,
function will be temporarily suspended.
resulting in an accident.
The engine control of the traction control
6 function and normal brake operation will not
Note that the correct towing method depends
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s
be affected. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
drive configuration.
When the temperature in the braking system
For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12.
has come down, the indicator will be
turned off and the traction control function CAUTION
will start operating again.  The system may be malfunctioning.
Cruise control*
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the E00609102685

engine.
NOTE Cruise control is an automatic speed control
Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
play/indicator goes out. If they go out, there system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
 The indicator may turn on when you start vated at approximately 40 km/h or more.
is no abnormal condition. If they do not go
the engine. This means that the battery volt-
out or appear frequently, it is not necessary
age momentarily dropped when the engine
was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
to stop the vehicle immediately, but we rec- CAUTION
ommend you to have your vehicle inspected.
tion, provided that the indicator goes out  When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
immediately. turn off the cruise control for safety.
 Do not use cruise control when driving con-
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
ASC warning lamp/display speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
E00619402030
slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
tem, the following warning lamp/warning
display will turn on.

6-34 Starting and driving

 Cruise control*

NOTE B- “SET -” switch

 Cruise control may not be able to keep your
speed on uphills or downhills. Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. desired speed.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed. C- “RES +” switch
 Your speed may increase to more than the set
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use Used to increase the set speed and to return to
the brake to control your speed. As a result, the original set speed.
the set speed driving is deactivated. 6
D- “CANCEL” switch

Cruise control switches Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

NOTE 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired

 When operating the cruise control switches, speed, then push down and release the
press the cruise control switches correctly. “SET -” switch (B) when the indicator
The set speed driving may be deactivated
display appear on the information screen
automatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time.
of the multi-information display. The
vehicle will then maintain the desired
speed.
The “SET” indicator appears on the infor-
To activate mation screen of the multi-information
E00609302876
display.
1. With the operation mode in ON, press the
CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A)
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch to turn on the cruise control. The indicator
display appear on the information screen
Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
of the multi-information display.

Starting and driving 6-35

 Cruise control*
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.

To decrease the set speed

E00609501884

NOTE To increase your speed in small amounts, There are two ways to decrease the set speed.
 When you release the “SET -” switch (B), push up the “RES +” switch (C) for less than
the vehicle speed will be set. approximately 1 second and release it. SET - switch
Each time you push up the “RES +” switch
(C), your vehicle will go approximately
Push down and hold the “SET -” switch (B)
To increase the set speed 1.6 km/h faster.
while driving at the set speed, and your speed
E00609401955
will slow down gradually.
There are two ways to increase the set speed. Accelerator pedal When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
RES + switch While driving at the set speed, use the accel- set.
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
Push up and hold the “RES +” switch (C) then push down the “SET -” switch (B) and
while driving at the set speed, and your speed release the switch momentarily to set a new
will then gradually increase. desired cruising speed.

6-36 Starting and driving

 Cruise control*

6
To slow down your speed in small amounts,
push down the “SET -” switch (B) for less
NOTE
than approximately 1 second and release it.
To temporarily increase or  In some driving conditions, the set speed
Each time you push down the “SET -” switch decrease the speed driving may be deactivated. If this happens,
refer to “To activate” on page 6-35 and
(B), your vehicle will slow down by approxi- E00609601436
repeat the speed setting procedure.
mately 1.6 km/h.
To temporarily increase the speed
Brake pedal To temporarily decrease the speed
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
normally. When you release the pedal, you
While driving at the set speed, use the brake Depress the brake pedal to decrease the
will return to your set speed.
pedal, which disengages the cruise control, speed. To return to the previously set speed,
then push down the “SET -” switch (B) and push up the “RES +” switch (C).
release the switch momentarily to set a new Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
desired cruising speed. 6-38.

Starting and driving 6-37

 Cruise control*
The set speed driving is deactivated automati-
cally in any of the following ways.
CAUTION
 When the set speed driving is deactivated
 When your speed slows to approximately automatically in any situation other than
15 km/h or more below the set speed those listed above, there may be a system
malfunction.
because of a hill, etc.
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
 When your speed slows to approximately switch to turn off the cruise control and have
40 km/h or less. your vehicle inspected by an authorised
 When the active stability control (ASC) MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
starts operating.
6 Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 6-32. To resume the set speed
To deactivate E00609802305

E00609703125
WARNING If the set speed driving is deactivated by the
 Although the set speed driving will be condition described in “To deactivate” on
The set speed driving can be deactivated as deactivated when shifting to the “N” page 6-38, you can resume the previously set
follows: (NEUTRAL) position, never move the speed by push up the “RES +” switch (C)
selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)
 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF while driving at a speed of approximately
position while driving.
switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned 40 km/h or higher. The “SET” indicator
You would have no engine braking and
off.) could cause a serious accident. appears on the information screen of the
 Press the “CANCEL” switch (D). multi-information display.
 Depress the brake pedal. Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-
vated as follow:

 When the engine speed rises and

approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-coloured part of the tachometer dial).

6-38 Starting and driving

 Rear-view camera*

Range of view of rear-view Range of view of rear-view camera

camera
Under either of the following conditions,
The range of view of the rear-view camera is
however, using the switch does not allow you
limited to the area shown in the illustrations.
to resume the previously set speed. In these
It cannot show the both sides and the lower
situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
part of the rear bumper, etc.
 The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF When reversing, be sure to visually confirm
switch is pressed. safety around the vehicle. 6
 The operation mode is put in OFF.
 Indicator display goes off. Location of rear-view camera
The rear-view camera (A) is integrated into
Rear-view camera* the part near the tailgate handle.
E00618402961

The rear-view camera is a system that shows

the view behind the vehicle on a screen of the
Display audio.

CAUTION
 The rear-view camera is an assistance system
that enables the driver to check for obstacles
behind the vehicle. Its range of view is lim-
ited, so you should not overly depend on it.
Please drive just as carefully as you would if
the vehicle did not have the rear-view cam-
How to use the rear-view cam-
era. era
 Be sure to visually confirm safety around the
vehicle with your own eyes. Do not depend When you place the selector lever in the “R”
entirely on the rear-view camera. (REVERSE) position with the operation
mode in ON, the view behind the vehicle will

Starting and driving 6-39

 Rear-view camera*
automatically appear on the screen of the Dis-
play audio. When you move the selector lever
NOTE NOTE
 Please observe the following cautions. Ignor-  When the vehicle is tilting because of the
to any other position, the screen will return to
ing them could lead to a camera malfunction. number of people in the vehicle, the weight
its original indication.
• Do not subject the camera to physical and positioning of luggage, and/or the condi-
shock. tion of the road surface, the lines in the view
CAUTION • Do not apply wax to the camera. from the rear-view camera may not be accu-
 The rear-view camera has a special lens that • Do not splash the camera with boiling rately positioned relative to the actual road.
can make objects shown on the screen appear water. The reference lines for distance and vehicle
to be closer or further away than they actu- • Do not disassemble the camera. width are based on a level, flat road surface.
6 ally are. In the following cases, objects shown on the
screen will appear to be farther off than they
Reference lines on the screen actually are.
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
NOTE down with the weight of passengers and
 Because the rear-view camera has a special Three reference lines for distance and the top
luggage in the vehicle.
lens, the lines on the ground between parking of the rear bumper (A) are shown on the
spaces may not look parallel on the screen. screen.
 In the following situations, the screen indica-
tion may be difficult to see. There is no
abnormality.
• Low light (nighttime)
• When the light of the sun or the light from a
vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into the
lens
 If the camera is hot and is then cooled by
rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This A: Actual objects
phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc- B: Objects shown on the screen
tion.
 It is not possible to fully see obstacles when
the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes contami-
nated by water droplets, snow, mud, or oil,
wipe off the contamination, taking care not
to scratch the lens.

6-40 Starting and driving

 Cargo loads

NOTE NOTE Cargo loads

• When there is an upward slope at the back.  The reference lines for distance and vehicle E00609902902
width are intended to indicate the distance to
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
This may make the distance to a projecting
Cargo loads precautions
object shown on the screen differ from the
actual distance to the projecting object. Do
not use them as a guide to distances to solid CAUTION
objects.  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than the
Example: On the screen the point B appears
the nearest, then the point C and A in order
top of the seatback. Be sure that your cargo
or luggage cannot move once your vehicle is 6
of distance. The point A and B actually are moving. Having the rear view blocked, and
A: Actual objects the same distances from the vehicle, and the your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if
B: Objects shown on the screen point C is farther off than the point A and B. you suddenly have to brake can cause a seri-
ous accident or injury.
 Load heavy cargo or luggage in the front of
the vehicle. If the load in the back of the
vehicle is too heavy, steering may become
unstable.

Starting and driving 6-41

For pleasant driving

Important air conditioning operating tips ........................................7-2 Bottle holder ..................................................................................7-39

Ventilators ........................................................................................7-2 Convenient hook ............................................................................7-40
Manual air conditioning ...................................................................7-6 Assist grips ....................................................................................7-40
Rear air conditioning .......................................................................7-8 Coat hook .......................................................................................7-40
Air purifier .......................................................................................7-9
AM/FM radio/CD player with AUX* ..............................................7-9
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-10
7
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-12
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-15
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-16
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-19
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-20
Listen to MP3s/WMAs/AACs .......................................................7-21
Listen to an iPod* ...........................................................................7-22
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device*........................................7-24
Use AUX* ......................................................................................7-26
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-26
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-27
Time Setting ...................................................................................7-28
Troubleshooting .............................................................................7-29
Antenna*.........................................................................................7-30
Link System* ..................................................................................7-31
USB input terminal* .......................................................................7-31
Sun visors .......................................................................................7-33
Accessory socket ...........................................................................7-34
Room lamps ...................................................................................7-34
Storage spaces ................................................................................7-36
Drink holder ...................................................................................7-39
 Important air conditioning operating tips
 When operating the system, make sure the weather. This is to prevent poor lubrication of
Important air conditioning air intake, which is located in front of the the compressor internal parts and to maintain
operating tips windscreen, is free of obstructions such as the air conditioning in the best operating con-
E00708302522 leaves and snow. Leaves collected in the dition.
air-intake plenum may reduce air flow
CAUTION and plug the plenum water drains.
 The engine speed may increase when the air
Ventilators
conditioning is operating. E00700102247

With an increased engine speed, an A/T Air conditioning system refrig-

vehicle will creep to a greater degree than erant and lubricant recommen- Front ventilators
with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
dations E00774900064

7 creeping.
If the air conditioning seems less effective
 Park the vehicle in the shade. than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
Parking in the hot sun will make the vehi- leak. We recommend you to have the system
cle inside extremely hot, and it will inspected.
require more time to cool the interior. The air conditioning system in your vehicle
If it is necessary to park in the sun, open must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-
the windows for the first few minutes of 134a and the lubricant ND-OIL8.
air conditioning operation to expel the hot Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will
air. cause severe damage which will result in the
 Close the windows when the air condi- need to replace your vehicle’s entire air con- 1- Centre ventilators
tioning is in use. The entry of outside air ditioning system. The release of refrigerant 2- Side ventilators
through open windows will reduce the into the atmosphere should be prevented.
cooling efficiency. It is recommended that the refrigerant be
 Too much cooling is not good for the recovered and recycled for further use.
health. The inside air temperature should
only be 5 to 6 °C below the outside air During a long period of disuse
temperature.
The air conditioning should be operated for at
least five minutes each week, even in cold

7-2 For pleasant driving

 Ventilators

Rear ventilators Rear ventilators

E00775000088

Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow

direction.

7
Front side ventilators

Adjusting the air flow direction Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow
direction.
E00700202352
To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
outside as far as possible. NOTE
Front centre ventilators  The cool air from the ventilators may appear
as a mist.
Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow This is due to moist air being suddenly
direction. cooled by the air conditioning. This will
clear after a few moments.
 Be careful not to spill beverages, etc., into
the ventilators.
Doing so might cause the air conditioning
not to function normally.

1- Close
2- Open

For pleasant driving 7-3

 Ventilators

Changing the position of air flowing from the front ventilators

E00700302757

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the front ventilators, turn the mode selection dial.

7-4 For pleasant driving

 Ventilators

The mode selection and air flowing from the front ventilators
These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the front ventilators.
: Small amount of air from the ventilators
: Medium amount of air from the ventilators
: Large amount of air from the ventilators

Face position Foot/Face position Foot position

Foot/Demister position Demister position

NOTE
 With the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the upper part of the passenger compartment. With the mode

selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area.

For pleasant driving 7-5

 Manual air conditioning
• Adjusting the temperature control  3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
Manual air conditioning P.7-7 ing the blower speed selection dial clock-
E00731101161
• Cooling  P.7-8 wise or anticlockwise.
The air conditioning can only be used while • Heating  P.7-8 4. Set the temperature rather high by using
the engine is running. • Switching the air conditioning system the temperature control dial.
ON/OFF  P.7-7
• Switching outside air and recirculated air
 P.7-7
CAUTION
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
• Driving in polluted outside air condi-
through all the windows.
tions  P.7-8
 Do not set the temperature to the max. cool
position. Cool air will blow against the win-
7 Demisting of the windscreen dow glasses and prevent demisting.

and door windows

E00776400050
NOTE
 When demisting quick, set the blower to the
1- Mode selection dial  P.7-4 maximum speed and the temperature to the
2- Blower speed selection dial  P.7-6 highest position.
3- Temperature control dial  P.7-7  To demist the door windows effectively,
4- Rear window demister switch  direct the air flowing of the side ventilators
P.5-44 towards the door windows.
5- Air selection switch  P.7-7  When the mode selection dial is set to the
6- Air conditioning switch  P.7-7 “ ” position, the air selection will auto-
matically be set to outside air.
 Usage
• Changing the position of air flowing 1. Press the air conditioning switch to turn it
from the ventilators  P.7-4 on. Adjusting the blower speed
• Demisting of the windscreen and door E00771500069
2. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
windows → P.7-6 position. Select the blower speed by turning the blower
• Adjusting the blower speed  P.7-6 speed selection dial clockwise or anticlock-
• To stop the fan  P.7-7 wise.

7-6 For pleasant driving

 Manual air conditioning
The blower speed will gradually increase as
the dial is turned clockwise.
Adjusting the temperature con-
trol
E00771600060

The temperature control dial is used to select

the desired air temperature.
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
to make the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise
to make the air cooler.

7
Switching outside air and recir-
culated air
To stop the fan E00771900063

E00772100062
To change the air selection, simply press the
air selection switch.

 Outside air: Indicator lamp (A) is OFF

Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
Switching the air conditioning  Recirculated air: Indicator lamp (A) is ON
system ON/OFF Air is recirculated inside the passenger
E00775900045 compartment.
Press the switch to turn the air conditioning
on, the indicator lamp (A) will come on.
Press the switch again to switch it off.
Turn the blower speed selection dial to the
“OFF” position.

For pleasant driving 7-7

 Rear air conditioning

7
CAUTION CAUTION
 Normally, use the outside position to keep  If high cooling performance is desired, set Driving in polluted outside air
the windscreen and side windows clear and air selection switch to the recirculation posi- conditions
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- tion and the temperature control dial all the E00775200064
screen. way to the left.
If high cooling performance is desired, or if Switch to the outside position periodically to If the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-
the outside air is dusty or otherwise contami- increase ventilation so that the windows do taminated when driving through a tunnel or in
nated, use the recirculation position. Switch not become fogged up. a traffic jam, press the air selection switch to
to the outside position periodically to set the air selection to recirculated air.
increase ventilation so that the windows do Refer to “Switching outside air and recircu-
not become fogged up.
Heating lated air” on page 7-7.
 Use of the recirculation position for an
E00775700043
extended time may cause the windows to fog
up. Select dials and switch as shown in the illus- Rear air conditioning
tration according to your purpose. E00707701287

The rear air conditioning can be used while

Cooling the manual air conditioning is turned on.
E00771800062 Refer to “Cooling” on page 7-8.
Select dials and switches as shown in the
1. Turn the temperature control dial to turn
illustration according to your purpose.
on the manual air conditioning.

7-8 For pleasant driving

 Air purifier
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
ing the blower speed selection dial of the
NOTE NOTE
 Operation in certain conditions such as driv-  If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
rear air conditioning clockwise or anti-
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the it may create noise from the audio equip-
clockwise.
air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser- ment. This does not mean that anything is
vice life of the filter. When you feel that the wrong with your audio equipment. In such a
airflow is lower than normal or when the case, use the cellular phone at a place as far
windscreen or windows start to fog up easily, away as possible from the audio equipment.
replace the air filter.  If foreign objects or water get into the audio
We recommend you to have it checked. equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour
comes from it, immediately turn off the
audio system. We recommend you to have it
AM/FM radio/CD player checked. Never try to repair it by yourself. 7
Avoid continuous usage without inspection
with AUX* by a qualified person.
E00708503866

A- Blower speed selection dial The audio system can only be used when the Important Points on Usage
ignition switch or the operation mode is in E00735501118

ON or ACC.
When the engine is stopped or the manual air iPod/iPhone Playback Function*
conditioning is not turned on, the rear air con-
ditioning fan will operate without cooling. NOTE  This product supports audio playback
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless oper-
from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif-
ation system, if the operation mode is left in
Air purifier ACC, the accessory power will automatically
fering versions mean that playback cannot
E00708401861 turn off after a certain period of time and you be guaranteed.
will no longer be able to use the audio sys-  Please be aware that depending on the
An air filter has been incorporated into this
tem. The accessory power comes on again if iPod/iPhone model or version, operation
air conditioning so that dirt and dust are
the engine switch is operated with it in the may differ.
cleaned from the air.
“ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-
Replace the air filter periodically as its ability cutout function” on page 6-12.
to clean the air will be reduced as it collects How to Clean
pollen and dirt. For the maintenance interval, E00735701149

refer to the “SERVICE BOOKLET”.  If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a
soft cloth.

For pleasant driving 7-9

 Handling of Discs
 If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in
neutral detergent diluted in water, and
NOTE Important Points on Handling
 iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual
then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thin-  Fingerprints or other marks on the read
users to privately reproduce and play non-
ners, or other chemical wipes. This may surface of the disc may result in its con-
copyrighted material as well as material that
harm the surface. may be legally copied and reproduced. tent being more difficult to read. When
Infringement of copyright is prohibited. holding the disc, grip both edges, or one
Trademarks edge and the centre hole, in order that the
Supported models read surface is not touched.
E00735801456

 Product names and other proper names  Do not affix paper or stickers, or other-
 iPhone5S
are the trademarks or registered trade- wise damage the disc.
 iPhone5c
marks of their respective owners.  Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is
7  Furthermore, even if there is no specific
 iPhone5
 iPhone4S
already within the device. This can result
denotation of trademarks or registered in damage to discs, or malfunction.
 iPhone4
trademarks, these are to be observed in  iPhone3GS
their entirety.  iPhone3G Cleaning
 iPhone
 iPod Nano (3rd Generation ~ 7th Genera-  Periodically clean the read surface of the
tion) disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
 iPod Touch (1st Generation ~ 5th Genera- cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out-
“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” wards from the centre of the disc to the
mean that an electronic accessory has tion)
 iPod Classic outer edge.
been designed to connect specifically to  New discs may have burring around the
iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been outer edge or in the hole in the centre.
certified by the developer to meet Apple Handling of Discs Ensure you check for these. If there are
performance standards. E00735901255 burrs, these may lead to faulty operation,
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and therefore ensure these are removed.
This explains care that should be taken in the
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
handling of discs.
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Apple is not responsible for the operation Important Points on Storage
of this device or its compliance with  When not using discs, ensure these are
safety and regulatory standards. kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun-
light.

7-10 For pleasant driving

 Handling of Discs
 If discs are not going to be used for a long Maxi-  Discs that have not been finalized cannot
period of time, remove these from the mum Com- be played.
product. Type Size  Even if recorded using the correct format
playing ments
time on a recorder or computer, application
Disc Playback Environment software settings and environments; disc
CD-DA 12 cm 74 minutes — peculiarities, damage, or marking; or dirt
In cold environments such as in mid-winter or condensation on the lens inside the
when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn- product may render the disc unplayable.
ing the heater on and immediately trying to CD-TEXT 12 cm 74 minutes —  Depending on the disc, some functions
use the product may cause condensation may not be used, or the disc may not be
(water droplets) to form on the disc and inter- played.
nal optical components, and this may prevent  Do not use discs with cracks or warps. 7
the product from operating correctly. CD-R/RW 12 cm — •Disc  If the disc has stickers affixed, remains
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait contain- from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
a short time before use. ing sive, then do not use the disc.
MP3,  Discs that have decorative labels or stick-
Copyright WMA, ers may not be used.
AAC
Actions such as unauthorised reproduction, files Nonstandard CDs
broadcast, public performance, or rental of
discs that comprise other than personal use This product will play audio CDs, however
are prohibited by law. Discs That May Not Be Played please be aware of the following points
regarding CD standards.
 Playback of discs other than those
Types of Disc That Can Be described in “Types of Disc That Can Be
 Ensure that you use discs with on the
Played Played” is not guaranteed.
label surface.
E00736001224  8 cm discs may not be used.
 Playback of other than standard CDs is
The following marks are printed on the disc  Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for
not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be
label, package, or jacket. example, heart-shaped), as these may
played, the audio quality cannot be guar-
result in malfunction. Additionally, discs
anteed.
that have transparent portions may not be
 When playing other than standard CDs,
played.
the following may occur.

For pleasant driving 7-11

 Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)
• There may be noise during playback.
• There may be jumping in the audio.
CAUTION Folder Structure
 Actions such as copying audio CDs or files E00736301139
• The disc may not be recognized.
and either distributing these to others for free Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized.
• The first track may not be played.
or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter-
• It may take longer than usual before start You can create a folder structure as in Genre -
net or other means to servers is an infringe-
of playback of tracks. Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC
ment of the law.
• Playback may start from within the format audio files) for management of tracks.
 Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”,
track. “.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than
• Some parts may not be played. MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing discs
• Tracks may freeze during playback. with these types of files recorded upon them ROOT Folder
• Tracks may be displayed erroneously. may cause the files to be incorrectly identi-
7 fied for playback, which may lead to loud Audio file
noise, resulting in speaker damage or acci-
Audio Files dent.
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
E00736101238
NOTE
This product can play MP3/WMA/AAC for-
 Depending on the condition of the disc
mat audio files recorded on CD-ROM, CD- recorder or recording software used, correct
R/RW, and USB devices. playback may not be possible. In these cases, 1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level
refer to the owner’s manual for your product
There are limitations on the files and media or software.
that can be used, therefore read the following  Depending on your computer’s operating
prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format system, version, software, or settings, files
audio files on discs or USB devices. may not have a file extension appended. In
Additionally, ensure you read the owner’s these cases, append the file extensions
manuals for your CD-R/RW drive and the “.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying
writing software, and ensure these are used the files.
correctly.  Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files played back.
includes title information or other data, then
this can be displayed.

7-12 For pleasant driving

 Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)
Speci- Speci- video compression standard used in video
Name fica- Explanation Name fica- Explanation CDs, etc.
tion tion MP3 is one of the audio compression meth-
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard,
Format ISO96 Level Maximum 8 Maxi- CD 509 files and reduces the quality of sounds that are
specifica- 60 1 character file mum file beyond the auditory resolution of the human
tions name, and 3 number 10,000 files ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
character file (total USB (Up to 100 files can be creating high-quality data with a lower data
extension. number stored in one folder.) size.
(single-byte on media) Because this can compress CD audio to
alphanumeric File name Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni- approximately 1/10 its original data size with-
capital letters,
numerals, “_”
and folder code, 32 characters), files/ fold- out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs 7
name ers with file/ folder names can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
may be used) restric- longer than this will not be dis-
ISO96 Joliet Files names up tions played or played.
CAUTION
60 to a maximum USB sup- The recommended file system is  MP3 files different to the standards at right
exten- 64 characters ported FAT32. may not be played correctly, or file/folder
sion can be used. formats 1 partition only names may not be displayed correctly.
Multises- Not supported (only first ses-
sion sion supported)
NOTE Standards for MP3 Files That Can
Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st  The order in which folders and audio files
mum level) are displayed on this product may be differ- Be Played
number ent to how they are displayed on a computer.
of levels Specifications for MP3 files that can be
Maxi- CD 255 folders played are as below.
mum What Is MP3?
folder E00736401084 Item Details
number USB 100 folders MP3 is an abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
(includ- Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
ing root) “Motion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a

For pleasant driving 7-13

 Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)
Item Details format that has a higher compression ratio Item Details
than MP3.
Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48 Bit rate [kbps] 32 to 192
frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24 VBR Support
[kHz] NOTE
(variable bit rate)
 Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows
Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- Channel mode Stereo/Monaural
[kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 180 poration (USA) and in other countries.
File extension wma
VBR (varia- Support Supported tag WMA tags
ble bit rate) information Title name, Artist name,
CAUTION
Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual  WMA supports digital rights management Album name
7 mode channel/ Monaural (DRM). This product cannot play WMA files Maximum num- 64 characters
File exten- mp3 protected using this system. ber of characters
sion  WMA files different to the standards at right that can be indi-
may not be played correctly, or file/folder cated on the dis-
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, names may not be displayed correctly.
tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4 play
 “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup-
tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni- ported.
code)), Titles, Artist name, What Is AAC?
Album name E00736801088

Maximum 64 characters Standards for WMA Files That AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio
number of Can Be Played Coding, and this is an audio compression
characters standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”.
that can be Specifications for WMA files that can be This features 1.4x the compression of MP3,
indicated on played are as below. with comparable audio quality.
the display
Item Details CAUTION
What Is WMA? Specification Windows Media Audio  AAC supports digital rights management
E00736601073 Version7.0/8.0/9.0 (DRM). This product cannot play AAC files
protected using this system.
WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- quency [kHz]
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression
7-14 For pleasant driving
 Important Points on Safety for the Customer

CAUTION Item Details WARNING

 AAC files different to the standards at right Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags  The driver should not perform compli-
may not be played correctly, or file/folder information Title, Artist name, cated operations while driving.
names may not be displayed correctly. Album name Performing complicated operations while
driving may prevent the driver looking
Maximum number 64 characters where they are going, and cause an acci-
Standards for AAC Files That Can of characters that dent.
Be Played can be indicated on Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca-
the display tion before performing such operations.
Specifications for AAC files that can be  Do not use during malfunctions, such as
played are as below. when no sound is audible.
Important Points on Safety This may lead to accident, fire, or electric 7
Item Details for the Customer shock.
E00737001276
 Ensure water or other foreign objects do
Specification Advanced Audio not enter the product.
Coding This product features a number of pictorial This may lead to smoking, fire, electric
MPEG4/AAC-LC indications as well as points concerning han- shock, or malfunction.
MPEG2/AAC-LC dling so that you can use the product cor-  Do not insert foreign objects into the disc
rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent slot.
Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/ injury or damage to yourself, other users, or This may lead to fire, electric shock, or
fre- 24/32/44.1/48 property. malfunction.
quency MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/  In the event of abnormalities occurring
[kHz] 24/32/44.1/48 when foreign objects or water enter the
WARNING product, resulting in smoke or a strange
Bit rate MPEG4 16 to 320  The driver should not pay close attention smell, immediately stop using the product,
[kbps] MPEG2 16 to 320 to the display while driving. and consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
This may prevent the driver looking MOTORS dealer.
VBR (variable bit Support where they are going, and cause an acci- Continuing to use the product may result
rate) dent. in accident, fire, or electric shock.
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural  Do not disassemble or modify the product.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
File extension m4a
tric shock.

For pleasant driving 7-15

 Operation Keys

WARNING
 During thunderstorms, do not touch the
antenna or the front panel.
This may lead to electrical shock from
lightning.

CAUTION
 Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
on the product.
Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
7 prevent heat from escaping from within the Turn the power on, and resume playback Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key clockwise
product, leading to fire or malfunction. from the previous status. to increase, and counter-clockwise to
 Do not turn the volume up to the extent that 2. Hold down the SEL•PWR•VOL key. decrease the volume.
you cannot hear sounds from outside the Turn the power OFF.
vehicle while driving.
Driving without being able to hear sounds NOTE
from outside the vehicle may result in an
NOTE  The maximum value for volume is “49”, and
accident.  Hold down the steering MODE button to
the minimum is “0”.
 Do not insert your hand or fingers into the also turn the audio function ON/OFF.
 The initial setting for volume is “17”.
disc slot.
This may result in injury.
Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs
E00737301152
E00737401179
Operation Keys 1. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to adjust
1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
the volume.
E00737101277 label surface up.

Turn the Power ON/ OFF

E00737201249

1. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key.

7-16 For pleasant driving

 Operation Keys

Disc slot

Disc
*Label side

Push the disc in a certain amount, and the 7

product will pull the disc in, and playback
will start.
2. Press the key.
This will eject the disc from the product,
so remove the disc.

CAUTION
 When replacing discs, first ensure that the
vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
ping is permitted.
 Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
injury, smoking, or fire.
 8 cm CDs are not supported.

For pleasant driving 7-17

 Operation Keys

Explanation of Buttons
E00737501460

This explains names and functions of each part.

1- key 5- MEDIA key 8- SEL•PWR•VOL key

Use to eject a disc. Each time this is pressed, the audio Adjust the volume, and turn the power
2- 1DISP key source switches in the order “CD”, ON/OFF. Additionally, adjust audio
Switch the content of the display. “USB/iPod”, and “AUX”. quality and select items.
For radio, use as preset key 1. 6- RADIO key 9- key
3- 2PAGE key Switch the radio and the band. Return to the previous operation.
Display the content page forward. 7- key/ key 10- Disc slot
For radio, use as preset key 2. For audio, press to select audio 11- AUTO-P key
4- 3key track/file and hold down to rewind/fast Auto preset the radio.
For radio, use as preset key 3. forward;
for radio, select radio station.

7-18 For pleasant driving

 Listen to Radio
12- 4RPT key 2- button, button Switch between AM and FM bands.
For audio, press to turn repeat playback The selected band is indicated on the display.
Select CD and other audio source tracks
mode on/off; for radio, use as preset and radio stations.
key 4. Hold down to fast forward and rewind. NOTE
13- 5RDM key 3- MODE button  Each time the RADIO key is pressed, this
For audio, press to turn random play- Hold down to turn the audio function switches in the order “FM1”, “FM2”, and
back mode on/off; for radio, use as pre- ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is “AM”.
set key 5. pressed, this switches the audio source.
14- 6key The order of switching is as shown
For radio, use as preset key 6. below. Manual/Seek Station Selection
15- /MENU key
Switch to Menu mode. 7
Press the key or the key to the fre-
16- Auxiliary Audio connector (mini-jack)
quency to listen to.
Connect a commercially-available
audio device.
Increases the frequency
key
being received.
Steering wheel audio remote Reduces the frequency
control switches key
being received.
E00737601937
key Release the button to start
(hold down) seek station selection, and
when a station is received,
key scanning stops.
(hold down)
Listen to Radio
E00737701286

This explains how to listen to AM and FM Preset Memory

radio broadcasts.
Register the broadcast station in advance, and
To Listen to the Radio select this at a later time.
1- Volume up/down switch
1. Tune in to the frequency to register.
Adjust audio functions volume. Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
For pleasant driving 7-19
 Listen to CDs
2. Hold down any of the keys from the If a disc is already within the product, press
1DISP key to the 6 key.
CAUTION the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
 Please be aware that the formerly-registered
source.
A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is frequency in the memory will be overwrit-
registered. ten.
Select the Track
NOTE NOTE
 The preset memory can register a maximum
Press the key or key to select the
 Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
of 6 stations for each band. track.
ously registered frequency.
 If a preset key that already has a station reg-  Each time the AUTO-P key is pressed, this This enables selection of the next or previous
istered is selected, then this is overwritten switches between normal reception and
7 with the new preset. AUTO-P mode.
track.
 Pressing the preset key will select the previ-  In the AUTO-P mode, manual/seek station
ously registered frequency. selection, as well as scan operation is also Fast Forward or Rewind
possible.
 When strong signal is less than 6 stations, the
Hold down the key or key.
Auto Preset minimum signal is registered in the remain-
ing preset keys.
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
The top 6 stations with a strong signal can be
automatically registered in order with preset
Listen to CDs Switch Playback Mode
keys in the AUTO-P mode.
E00737801261

Hold down the AUTO-P key. This explains how to listen to audio CDs Repeat playback and random playback are
(CD-DA/CD-TEXT). possible.
Switch to the AUTO-P mode, and start auto-
matic station selection.
After completion of operations, the product Play CDs Repeat Playback (RPT)
will receive the station registered in the preset
key [1]. Press the 4RPT key.
Insert the disc.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
played.
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-16)

7-20 For pleasant driving

 Listen to MP3s/WMAs/AACs

NOTE Listen to Fast Forward or Rewind

 Pressing again will cancel.
MP3s/WMAs/AACs
 Ejecting will cancel this.
E00737901259 Hold down the key or key.
This explains how to listen to audio files on a
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
Random Playback (RDM) disc.

Switch Playback Mode

Press the 5RDM key. To Listen to
MP3s/WMAs/AACs Repeat playback and random playback are
Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
possible.
Insert the disc. 7
NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel. Insert a disc to automatically start playback. Repeat Playback (RPT)
 Ejecting will cancel this.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-16)
If a disc is already within the product, press Press the 4RPT key.
the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
Search Tracks source. Repeat playback of the track currently being
played.
This enables search of the track while playing NOTE
music.  Depending on the file structure, it may take NOTE
some time to read the contents of the disc.  Pressing the 4RPT key two times will cancel.
1. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key.  Ejecting will cancel this.
2. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select
the track. Select the Track (File)
3. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key. Folder Repeat Playback
This plays the selected track.
Press the key or key to select the
Press the 4RPT key during repeat playback of
track.
a track.
This enables selection of the next or previous
Repeat playback of the tracks within the
track.
folder currently being played.

For pleasant driving 7-21

 Listen to an iPod*

NOTE Search Tracks Listen to an iPod*

 Pressing again will cancel. E00738001606
 Ejecting will cancel this. Search folders and files, and select a track.
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat By connecting commercially-available
playback will not be cancelled. 1. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key. iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can
2. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select play tracks on these through the product.
the folder.
Random Playback (RDM) 3. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key. CAUTION
 Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in
Files within the selected folder are dis- the vehicle.
Press the 5RDM key.
played.
7 Play the tracks in the folder in a random 4. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select
 Never hold these devices in your hand to
operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
order. the file.  No indemnification for data loss resulting
5. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key. when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
product will be possible.
NOTE This plays the selected file (track).  Depending on how the devices are handled,
 Pressing the 5RDM key two times will can- audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
cel. it is recommended that data be backed up.
 Ejecting will cancel this. NOTE
 While the folder is selected, press the
key to cancel track search mode.
NOTE
Folder Random Playback  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
 Depending on the generation, model, or soft-
selecting the folder, then track search mode
ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback
will be cancelled.
Press the 5RDM key during playback of the on this product may not be possible.
 While the file is selected, press the key (P.7-10) Additionally, playback as
tracks in the folder in a random order.
to return to the previous operation. explained in this document may not be possi-
Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran-  While the file is selected, hold down the ble.
dom order. key to cancel track search mode.  Usage of iPod/iPhone hardware with the lat-
 Disc operations such as selecting a track will est software version is recommended.
cancel track search mode.  Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone,
NOTE refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page
 Pressing again will cancel. 7-32.

7-22 For pleasant driving

 Listen to an iPod*

NOTE Play iPod Repeat Playback (RPT)

 When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a
commercially-available iPod connection Press the MEDIA key to set the USB (iPod) Press the 4RPT key.
cable.
as the source.
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe Repeat playback of the track currently being
actions, such as plugging in the connection The selected source is indicated on the dis- played.
cable are taken while driving. play.
 When inserting and removing the
iPod/iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the
NOTE
vehicle. Select the Track (File)  Pressing again will cancel.
 Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone,
it may take some time until the device is rec-
Press the key or key to select the
7
ognized, or playback starts. Shuffle Playback (RDM)
 Depending on the iPod/iPhone, the button
track.
functions on the product may not operate Press the 5RDM key.
This enables selection of the next or previous
while the iPod/iPhone is connected.
track.
 iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may Play tracks in the category currently being
mean that connection is not possible, or played in a random order.
result in differences in operation or display. Fast Forward or Rewind
 Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone,
track information may not be displayed cor- NOTE
rectly. Hold down the key or key.  Pressing the 5RDM key two times will can-
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and cel.
device, the iPod/iPhone may not be played Fast forward/rewind is possible.
after starting the engine.
 Data containing copyright information may Switch Playback Mode Album Shuffle Playback
not be played back.
 It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
Repeat playback and shuffle playback are Press the 5RDM key during playback of the
equaliser settings be set to flat.
possible. album in a random order.
 Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
this product.
Play the album in a random order (tracks in
 If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
any order on the album).
then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod-
uct, reset, then reconnect.

For pleasant driving 7-23

 Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device*

NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 Pressing again will cancel.  While the track is selected, hold down the  Depending on how the devices are handled,
key to cancel track search mode. audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
 iPod operations such as selecting a track will it is recommended that data be backed up.
Search Tracks cancel track search mode.

NOTE
Search categories or track names, and select a Listen to Audio Files on a  Digital audio players that support the mass
track.
USB Device* storage class specifications can be con-
nected.
1. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key. E00736501623
 Regarding how to connect USB devices,
7 2. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select
By connecting commercially-available USB refer to “How to connect a USB memory
the category. device” on page 7-31.
devices such as USB memory to this product,
3. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key. Categories  When connecting a USB device, use a con-
you can play audio files on these through the
or tracks within the selected category are nection cable. Failure to use a connection
product.
displayed. cable when connecting may place undue load
4. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select on, or damage the USB connector.
the category or track. CAUTION  Set up the device in order that no unsafe
5. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key.  Do not leave the USB device unattended in actions, such as plugging in the connection
Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks. the vehicle. cable are taken while driving.
Select the track, and press the  Never hold these devices in your hand to  When inserting and removing the USB
SEL•PWR•VOL key to play. operate while driving, as this is dangerous. device, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi-
 Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem- cle.
ory readers, as damage may occur to these or  Do not insert other than audio devices into
NOTE to the data contained therein. If these are the USB port. Damage to the device or
 While the category (1st level) is selected, erroneously connected, then turn the ignition equipment may result.
press the key to cancel track search switch to the “LOCK” position or put the  Depending on the status of the USB device,
mode. operation mode in OFF, then remove. it may take some time until the device is rec-
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after  Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom- ognized, or playback starts.
selecting the category, then track search mended that files be backed up.  Depending on the USB device, the button
mode will be cancelled.  No guarantee is made as regards damage to functions on the product may not operate
the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam- while the USB device is connected.
 While the track is selected, press the key
age to data contained therein.
to return to the previous operation.

7-24 For pleasant driving

 Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device*

NOTE Select the Track (File) Folder Repeat Playback

 USB device specifications and settings may
mean that connection is not possible, or Press the 4RPT key during repeat playback of
Press the key or key to select the
result in differences in operation or display. a track.
track.
 Depending on audio data in the USB device,
track information may not be displayed cor- Repeat playback of the tracks within the
This enables selection of the next or previous
rectly. folder currently being played.
track.
 Depending on the status of the vehicle and
device, the iPod/iPhone may not be played
after starting the engine. Fast Forward or Rewind NOTE
 Data containing copyright information may  Pressing again will cancel.
not be played back.
Hold down the key or key.
 Even if the file is selected, folder repeat 7
 This product can play MP3, WMA, and AAC playback will not be cancelled.
format audio files.
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
 Depending on the type of USB device, usage
may not be possible, or functions that can be Folder Random Playback (RDM)
used may be restricted. Switch Playback Mode
 The recommended file system for USB Press the 5RDM key.
memory is FAT32.
Repeat playback and random playback are
 The maximum supported capacity for USB Play tracks in the folder currently being
memory is 32GB.
possible.
played in a random order.
 Operate the USB device containing recorded
audio files while connected to this product. Repeat Playback (RPT)
NOTE
 Pressing the 5RDM key two times will can-
Playback of Audio Files on a Press the 4RPT key. cel.
USB Device Repeat playback of the track currently being
played.
Press the MEDIA key to set All Folder Random Playback

USB as the source. The selected source is NOTE

Press the 5RDM key during playback of the
indicated on the display.  Pressing the 4RPT key two times will cancel.
tracks in the folder in a random order.

For pleasant driving 7-25

 Use AUX*
Play the tracks in all folders in a random
order.
NOTE CAUTION
 While the file is selected, press the key  Connect an audio device with external sound
to return to the previous operation. input mode canceled, or with the sound
NOTE turned down.
 While the file is selected, hold down the
 Pressing again will cancel.  Even if not inserted, the product will switch
key to cancel track search mode.
 Even if the file is selected, all folder random to AUX, therefore take care with volume
 Operations such as selecting a track will can-
playback will not be cancelled. levels when not inserted.
cel track search mode.

Search Tracks Use AUX* NOTE

 Depending on the audio device to be con-
7 E00736901210
nected, noise may be emitted.
Search folders and files, and select a track. By connecting external input cables and AUX  For power, use the battery power source
devices to this product, you can play tracks included in the audio device to be connected.
1. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key.
on these devices through the product. Using the connected audio device while
2. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select
charging through the cigarette lighter socket
the folder. Press the MEDIA key to switch to the AUX in the vehicle may lead to noise being emit-
3. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key. mode. ted through the speakers.
Files within the selected folder are dis-  If no audio devices are connected, then do
played. not select the external sound input mode. If
4. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select external sound input mode is selected while
the file. no audio devices are connected, then sound
5. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key. may be emitted through the speakers.
This plays the selected file (track).

NOTE Display Indicator

E00738101232
 While the folder is selected, press the
key to cancel track search mode. This explains content of the display indicator.
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
selecting the folder, then track search mode A- Auxiliary Audio connector (mini-jack)
will be cancelled.

7-26 For pleasant driving

 Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment

NOTE NOTE
 Up to 10 characters may be displayed at one  If there is no artist text information to dis-
time. To display 11 or more characters, press play, then “ARTIST” is displayed.
the 2PAGE key, and subsequent characters  If there is no album text information to dis-
will be displayed. play, then “ALBUM” is displayed.
 If there is no song text information to dis-
play, then “SONG” is displayed.
During CD-DA playback

This switches in the order “Track No. + play- During iPod Playback
time”, “Disc text” and “Track text”.
7
E00738901155

During other than Podcast playback, this

Change the Display Mode NOTE switches in the order “Track No. + playtime”,
E00738501278
 If there is no artist text information to dis-
“Artist text”, “Album text” and “Song text”.
You can change the content of the display play, then “Track No. + playtime” is dis- During Podcast playback, this switches in the
indicator. played. order “Track No. + playtime”, “Podcast
Press the 1DISP key to switch the display  If there is no album text information to dis- name”, “Episode name” and “Release date”.
content. play, then “DISC TEXT” is displayed.
 If there is no song text information to dis- NOTE
Each time the 1DISP key is pressed, the dis- play, then “TRACK TEXT” is displayed.
 If there is no artist text information to dis-
play content changes. play, then “ARTIST” is displayed.
 If there is no album text information to dis-
CAUTION During MP3/WMA/AAC Play- play, then “ALBUM” is displayed.
 The operation of changing display contents back  If there is no song text information to dis-
may impede safe driving, therefore check play, then “SONG” is displayed.
safety before operation. This switches in the order “Track No. + Play
time”, “Folder no/File no”, “Folder text”,
“File text”, “Artist text”, “Album text” and Audio Quality and Volume
“Song text”. Balance Adjustment
E00738201419

Change audio quality settings.

For pleasant driving 7-27
 Time Setting

Adjust Audio Quality and Vol- Adjust- CLOCK ADJUST MODE

Turn counter-
ment Turn clockwise
ume Balance items
clockwise
Set the time manually.
1. Press the /MENU key. BAL- L11~0 0~R11
2. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select ANCE (Emphasise (Emphasise 1. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to adjust
adjustment items and press the LEFT) RIGHT) the hour.
SEL•PWR•VOL key. 2. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key to set the
Turning the SEL•PWR•VOL key counter- hour then shift to adjust the minutes.
Time Setting 3. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to adjust
clockwise or clockwise, the adjustment
items switch as shown below.
E00770700077
the minutes.
This explains how to set time.
7 BASSTREBLEFADERBAL- 4. Press the /MENU key.
ANCE This completes the adjustment.
3. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to adjust 1. Hold down the /MENU key.
the adjustment items selected. 2. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select
“CLOCK MODE” or “CLOCK ADJUST
MODE”.
Adjust-
Turn counter- 3. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key to com-
ment Turn clockwise
clockwise plete.
items
The selected item is indicated on the dis-
BASS -5~0 0~+5 play.
(Decrease low (Increase low
frequency vol- frequency vol-
ume) ume) CLOCK MODE
TRE- -5~0 0~+5
This enables selection of the 12-hour clock or
BLE (Decrease high (Increase high
the 24-hour clock.
frequency vol- frequency vol-
ume) ume) 1. Turn the SEL•PWR•VOL key to select
FADER R11~0 0~F11 the 12-hour clock or the 24-hour clock.
(Emphasise (Emphasise 2. Press the SEL•PWR•VOL key to com-
REAR) FRONT) plete and the clock display is changed.

7-28 For pleasant driving

 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
E00738401349

Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.

If This Message Appears...

A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.

Mode Message Cause Response

CD DISC_ERROR The disc is damaged and/or dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
7
EJECT_E The disc cannot be ejected. Wait a while before ejecting again. If the problem
persists, consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
UNSUPPORT Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.  “Audio
files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-12)
PROTECT Audio files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Use audio files without DRM (Digital Rights Man-
Management) have been played. agement).
COM_ERROR Reading the contents of the CD has malfunctioned Turn the power OFF and wait a while. If the prob-
for some reason. lem persists, consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.

For pleasant driving 7-29

 Antenna*
Mode Message Cause Response
USB NO _ FILE There are no audio files that can be played. Confirm audio files that can be played.  “Audio
files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-12)
DEVICE _ ERR An unsupported USB device has been connected. Confirm the USB device.
BUS_POWER There is high electrical current. Confirm the USB device.
UNSUPPORT Unsupported audio files have been played. Select audio files that can be played.  “Audio
files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-12)
PROTECT Audio files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Select audio files that can be played.  “Audio
Management) have been played. files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-12)
7 COM_ERROR Reading the contents of the USB has malfunc- Turn the power OFF and wait a while. If the prob-
tioned for some reason. lem persists, consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
iPod NO _ SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
DEVICE _ ERR Audio data in the iPod/iPhone cannot be read. Confirm the iPod/iPhone that can be used. 
“Trademarks” (P.7-10)
BUS_POWER There is high electrical current. Confirm the USB device.
AUT-ERROR iPod/iPhone is not recognized correctly. Confirm the iPod/iPhone.
COM_ERROR Reading the audio data in the iPod/iPhone has mal- Turn the power OFF and wait a while. If the prob-
functioned for some reason. lem persists, consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
VER_ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.

Antenna* To remove
E00710502013

Turn the pole (A) anticlockwise.

7-30 For pleasant driving

 Link System*
allowing the connected devices to be operated 2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A)
by using the switches in the vehicle. Refer to on the centre console.
“USB input terminal” on page 7-31.

USB input terminal*

E00761901852

You can connect your USB memory device or

iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
memory device or iPod.
This section explains how to connect and
remove a USB memory device or iPod. 7
To install See the following section for details on how
3. Connect a commercially available USB
to play music files.
connector cable (C) to the USB memory
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-22. device (B).
(B) until it is securely retained. Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB
Device” on page 7-24.
NOTE
*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
 Be sure to remove the pole antenna in the
following cases:
Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• When going into an automatic car wash.
• When placing a car cover over the vehicle. How to connect a USB memory
• When driving into a structure that has a low device
ceiling.
E00762001805

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

Link System* the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
E00764501934
tion or put the operation mode in OFF.

The Link System takes overall control of the

devices connected via the USB input terminal

For pleasant driving 7-31

 USB input terminal*
4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to 4. Connect the connector cable (B) to the
the USB input terminal (D).
How to connect an iPod USB input terminal (C).
E00762101851

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A)
on the centre console.

NOTE 5. To remove the connector cable, turn the

 Do not connect the USB memory device to ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or
the USB input terminal directly. put the operation mode in OFF first and
The USB memory device may be damaged. perform the installation steps in reverse.

3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod. CAUTION

5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn
 After removing the USB connector cable, be
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- sure to close the terminal cover. Entry of for-
tion or put the operation mode in OFF NOTE eign matter into the terminal may cause a
first and perform the installation steps in  Use a genuine connector cable from Apple
malfunction.
reverse. Inc.

CAUTION
 After removing the USB connector cable, be
sure to close the terminal cover. Entry of for-
eign matter into the terminal may cause a
malfunction.

7-32 For pleasant driving

 Sun visors

Types of connectable devices Sun visors Ticket holder

and supported file specifica- E00711202831

tions The holder (A) is located on the back of the

E00762201575
sun visor.
For details about the types of connectable
devices and supported file specifications,
refer to the following pages and manuals.

[For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM

radio/CD player with AUX]
Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-22, 7
“Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device” on
page 7-24 and “Audio Files 1- To eliminate front glare
(MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-12. 2- To eliminate side glare

[For vehicles equipped with the Display

audio]
Vanity mirror CAUTION
Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
 Do not leave plastic cards in the ticket
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun holder.
visor. Because the inside of the vehicle will
become hot if the vehicle is parked in strong
sunlight, the cards could deform or crack.

For pleasant driving 7-33

 Accessory socket

Accessory socket Centre console Room lamps

E00711603340 E00712003051

CAUTION
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
same time, make sure that the electrical
accessories are 12 V accessories and that the
total power consumption does not exceed
120 W.
7  Long use of the electric appliance without
running the engine may run down the bat- Floor console box
tery.
1- Room lamp (front)
 When the accessory socket is not in use, be
2- Room lamp (rear)
sure to close the lid or install the cap,
because the socket might become clogged by
foreign material and be short-circuited.
NOTE
 If you leave the lamps on without running
To use a plug-in type accessory, remove the the engine, you will run down the battery.
cap, and insert the plug in the accessory Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that
socket. all the lamps are off.

NOTE Rear
 Accessory sockets in 3 locations can be used
at the same time.

The accessory socket can be used while the

ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC.

7-34 For pleasant driving

 Room lamps

Front
Position Position
of lamp On/off control of lamp On/off control
switch switch
2- Door Delayed off function Auto cut-out function
() The lamps illuminates when a If the lamps is left switched on
door or the tailgate is opened. It with the ignition switch is in the
goes off approximately 15 sec- “LOCK” or “ACC” position or
onds after the all doors and the the operation mode is in OFF or
tailgate are closed. ACC, and a door or the tailgate
However, the lamp goes off is opened, it goes off automati-
immediately with all doors and
the tailgate closed in the follow-
cally
30 minutes.
after approximately
7
Rear
ing cases: The lamp will illuminate again
 When the ignition switch is after it automatically goes off in
turned to the “ON” position the following cases:
or the operation mode is put  When the ignition switch is
in ON. turned to the “ON” position
 When the central door lock or the operation mode is put
function is used to lock the in ON.
vehicle.  When the keyless entry sys-
 When the keyless entry key tem or the keyless operation
or the keyless operation key system is operated.
Position is used to lock the vehicle.  When all doors and the tail-
of lamp On/off control  If the vehicle is equipped gate are closed.
switch with the keyless operation 3- OFF The lamps goes off regardless
1- The lamps illuminates regard- system, when the keyless ( ) of whether a door or the tailgate
( ) less of whether a door or the operation function is used to is open or closed.
tailgate is open or closed. lock the vehicle.

For pleasant driving 7-35

 Storage spaces

NOTE
 When the ignition key is removed or the
operation mode is put in OFF while the doors
and the tailgate are closed, the lamp illumi-
nates and after approximately 15 seconds it
goes off.
 The time until the lamp goes off (delayed
off) can be adjusted. For details, please con-
sult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.
 The auto cut-out function cannot be operated
1- Luggage floor box
7 when the front room lamp switch is in the
2- Floor console box
“ ” position.
Also, this function can be deactivated. For
3- Passenger’s seat under tray Driver’s side instrument panel
details, please consult an authorised 4- Glove box lower box
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. 5- Instrument panel lower tray E00777400057
6- Instrument panel lower secret box
7- Driver’s side instrument panel lower To open, pull the lever (A).
box
Storage spaces
E00713103684

CAUTION Glove box

E00726201395
 Never leave lighters, canned carbonated bev-
erage, and spectacles in the cabin when park- To open, pull the lever (A).
ing the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin
will become extremely hot, so lighters and
other flammable items may catch fire and
unopened drink cans may rupture. Also,
spectacles with plastic lenses or materials
could deform or crack.
 Keep the lids on storage spaces closed while
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
storage space could otherwise cause injuries.

7-36 For pleasant driving

 Storage spaces

Instrument panel lower tray Instrument panel lower secret NOTE

E00777500032
box  Cables for USB devices can pass through the
The instrument panel lower tray is on the cen- E00777600033
opening (B) near the cover handle (A).
tre console part. The instrument panel lower secret box is a
small storage compartment with a cover that
is located on the bottom of the centre console.
To open the instrument panel lower secret
box, place your finger on the cover handle
(A) of the cover and push.

 Do not use the instrument panel lower secret

7
box as an ashtray. This could cause a fire or
the tray will be damaged.

Floor console box

NOTE E00723302608
 Pull the partition (A) of the instrument panel
To open the floor console box, place your fin-
lower tray rearward to remove it. Store the
removed partition carefully so that it is not ger on the handle (A) of the cover and push
lost. slowly.

For pleasant driving 7-37

 Storage spaces
The spaces on the left and right sides of the
NOTE Removing and installing the tray
luggage floor box can be used to store small
 The tray (B) can be removed. The removed
items.
tray can be stored in the floor console box. To remove the tray, pull the tray forward until
it stops, and then pull it out from the rails
Passenger’s seat under tray while pushing the left and right hooks secur-
E00725701058 ing the tray to the rails.
To use this tray, lift it slightly and pull it for-
ward.

Luggage floor box

E00718702037

The box for storing articles is located inside

the luggage compartment.
To use the box, raise the luggage floor board.
To install the tray, align the left and right
Pull the strap (A) upward to lift the luggage
hooks with the rails, and then slide the tray
floor board.
onto the rails.
NOTE
 When using the tray from the rear seat, lift
the tray slightly and pull it rearward.

7-38 For pleasant driving

 Drink holder

NOTE CAUTION
 The tray can be removed and installed from  Do not drink beverages while driving. This is
the front or rear of the passenger seat. distracting and could cause an accident.

CAUTION For the front seat

 Be sure to push the tray in until it is locked in
place so that it does not open while you are The drink holder is located between the front
driving. seats.
 Do not place items with a total weight of 2
kg or more in the tray. The items could fly
out of the tray during sudden braking, result- 7
ing in an accident.
 Do not open or close the tray while driving.
Bottle holder
Otherwise, an accident could result. E00718201716

WARNING
 Do not spray water or spill beverages
Drink holder inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or
E00714502587 electrical components become wet, they
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
WARNING If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
 Do not spray water or spill beverages up as much liquid as possible and immedi-
inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or For the third seat ately consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
electrical components become wet, they MOTORS dealer.
E00719001173
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe The drink holder is located at the both side of
up as much liquid as possible and immedi- the third seat. CAUTION
ately consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
 Do not drink beverages while driving. This is
MOTORS dealer.
distracting and could cause an accident.
 Drinks could be spilled by the vibration and
jolts while driving. If the spilt drink is very
hot, you could be burnt.

For pleasant driving 7-39

 Convenient hook
There are bottle holders located on both sides
of front and rear doors.

7
CAUTION CAUTION
 Do not hang heavy luggage (more than  Do not use the assist grips when getting into
approximately 5 kg) on the hook. or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could
NOTE Doing so could cause damage to the hook. detach causing you to fall.
 Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
holder.
 Tightly close the cap on drink bottles before
storing them.
Assist grips Coat hook
E00732801514 E00725601813
 Some bottles may be too big or the wrong
shape to fit in the holder. The assist grips (located above the doors on There is a coat hook on the second seat assist
the headliner) are not designed to support grip of the both side.
body weight. They are intended for use only
Convenient hook while seated in the vehicle.
E00732901397

Light items of luggage can be hung from the

hook.

7-40 For pleasant driving

 Coat hook

For pleasant driving 7-41

For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

If the operation mode cannot be changed to OFF
(vehicles equipped with the keyless operation system) ...............8-2
Emergency starting ..........................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-3
Tools and jack ..................................................................................8-5
How to change a tyre .......................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-12 8
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-15
 If the vehicle breaks down
1. Move the selector lever to the “P”
If the vehicle breaks down (PARK) position, and then change the
CAUTION
 Do not attempt to start the engine by pulling
E00800102479
operation mode to OFF.
or pushing the vehicle. It could damage your
If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move 2. One of the other causes could be low bat-
vehicle.
it to the shoulder and use the hazard warning tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless
 Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
flashers and/or the warning triangle etc. entry system, keyless operation function, volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on and steering lock will also not operate. shorting can damage both vehicles.
page 5-41. Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI  Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
MOTORS dealer. size to prevent overheating of the cables.
If the engine stops/fails  Check the jumper cables for damage and cor-
rosion before use.
Emergency starting  Always wear protective eye goggles when
Vehicle operation and control are affected if E00800504839
working near the battery.
8 the engine stops. Before moving the vehicle If the engine cannot be started because the  Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
to a safe area, be aware of the following: battery is partially or fully discharged, the
battery from another vehicle can be used with 1. Get the vehicles close enough so the
 The brake booster becomes inoperative
jumper cables to start the engine. jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
and the pedal effort will increase. Press
down the brake pedal harder than usual. vehicles aren’t touching each other.
 Since the power steering system is no WARNING 2. Turn off all lamps, heater and other elec-
longer operative, the steering wheel feels  To start the engine using jumper cables trical loads.
heavy when turning it. from another vehicle, perform the correct 3. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
procedures according to the instruction cle. Put an A/T or CVT in “P” (PARK) or
below. Incorrect procedures could result a M/T in “N” (Neutral). Stop the engine.
If the operation mode can- in a fire or explosion or damage to the
vehicles.
not be changed to OFF WARNING
 Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away
 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles
(vehicles equipped with the from the battery because the battery may
beforehand. Make sure that the cables or
produce an explosion.
keyless operation system) your clothes cannot be caught by the fan
E00804900468 or drive belt. Personal injury could result.
If the operation mode cannot be changed to
OFF, perform the following procedure. 4. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the
proper level.

8-2 For emergencies

 Engine overheating
Refer to “Battery” on page 10-8. 6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has
the booster battery, let the engine idle a
WARNING few minutes, then start the engine in the
 If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or vehicle with the discharged battery.
appears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt
Jump Starting! CAUTION
A battery might rupture or explode if the  Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assis-
temperature is below the freezing point or tance running.
if it is not filled to the proper level.
 Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric
acid. 7. After the engine is started, disconnect the
If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into cables in the reverse order and keep the
contact with your hands, eyes, clothes or engine running for several minutes.
WARNING
the painted surface of your vehicle, it
should be thoroughly flushed with water.  Make sure that the connection is made 8
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them to the appointed position (shown in the NOTE
with water immediately and thoroughly, illustration). If the connection is made  If the vehicle is put in motion without fully
and get prompt medical attention. directly to the negative (-) side of the bat- charging the battery, it might cause the loss
tery, the inflammable gases generated of the smooth engine operation and the anti-
from the battery might catch fire and lock brake warning lamp to illuminate.
5. Connect one end of one jumper cable explode. Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-  When connecting the jumper cables, do page 6-29.
charged battery (A), and the other end not connect the positive (+) cable to the
to the positive (+) terminal of the booster negative (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks
might cause explosion of the battery.
battery (B). Engine overheating
Connect one end of the other jumper cable E00800604524
to the negative (-) terminal of the
CAUTION When the engine is overheating, the warning
booster battery, and the other end to will be displayed in the instrument cluster as
 Use care not to get the jumper cable caught
the appointed position (shown in the illus- in the cooling fan or other rotating part in the follows.
tration) of the vehicle with the discharged engine compartment.
battery at the point farthest from the bat-
tery.

For emergencies 8-3

 Engine overheating
 The information screen in the multi-infor- Stop the engine immediately and contact
mation display will be interrupted and the
WARNING an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
 Do not open the bonnet while steam is
engine coolant temperature warning dis- dealer for assistance.
coming from the engine compartment. It
play will appear. Also “ ” will blink. could cause steam or hot water to spurt
(TFT colour LCD) out, causing burns. Hot water could spurt
out even when there is no steam coming
“ ” will blink. (Mono-tone LCD)
out, and some parts will be very hot. Be
very careful when opening the bonnet.
If this occurs, take the following corrective
 Be careful of hot steam, which could be
measures:
blowing off the reserve tank cap.
 Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
while the engine is hot.
2. Check whether steam is coming from the
8 engine compartment.
*: Front of the vehicle
[If steam does not come from the engine
compartment]
With the engine still running, raise the WARNING
bonnet to ventilate the engine compart-
 Be careful not to get your hands or clothes
ment. caught in the cooling fan.
 Because the resistor (B) may be hot even if
[If steam is coming from the engine com-
the cooling fan has stopped, do not touch
partment] the resistor. Burns could result.
Stop the engine, and when the steam
stops, raise the bonnet to ventilate the
engine compartment. Restart the engine. 4. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank
3. Confirm that the cooling fan (A) is turn- (C).
ing.
[If the cooling fan is turning]
After the high coolant temperature warn-
ing has gone off, stop the engine.
[If the cooling fan is not turning]

8-4 For emergencies

 Tools and jack
If there is anything wrong with the cool-
ing system or drive belt, we recommend
Tools
you to have it checked and repaired.
FULL

Tools and jack

E00800902839
LOW

Storage

The tools and jack are stowed on the right

5. Add coolant to the radiator and/or reserve side of the luggage area.
tank if necessary. (Refer to the “Mainte- The storage location of the tools and jack
nance” section.) should be remembered in case of an emer- 1- Wheel nut wrench 8
gency. 2- Jack bar
WARNING 3- Towing hook
 Make sure that the engine has cooled
down before removing the radiator cap
(D), because hot steam or boiling water Jack
otherwise will gush from the filler port
and may scald you.
To remove
CAUTION 1. Remove the jack lid.
 Do not add coolant while the engine is hot. 2. Retract the jack and remove it from its
Suddenly adding cold coolant could damage installation fitting (A).
the engine. Wait for the engine to cool down, 1- Tools
then add coolant a little at a time. 2- Jack

6. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant

leakage and the drive belt for looseness or
damage.

For emergencies 8-5

 How to change a tyre

To retract How to change a tyre WARNING

E00801204383  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle.
Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle
If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
in a safe, flat location. jack could slip out of position, leading to
an accident.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
ground, free of loose pebbles, etc.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
NOTE
 The chocks shown in the illustration do not
(PARK) position and stop the engine.
come with your vehicle. It is recommended
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
that you keep ones in the vehicle for use if
warning triangle, flashing signal lamp, needed.
8 To store etc., at an adequate distance from the  If chocks are not available, use stones or any
vehicle, and have all your passengers other objects that are large enough to hold
1. Retract the jack, then return it to its origi- leave the vehicle. the wheel in position.
nal position. 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
2. Extend the jack and firmly secure it, then jacking up the vehicle, place chocks or
install the jack lid. 6. Get the jack bar and wheel nut wrench
blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally ready.
opposite from the tyre (B) you are chang- Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-5.
To retract ing.
To extend
Spare wheel information
E00803602114

The spare wheel is stored under the floor of

the luggage area.
Check the air pressure of the spare tyre fre-
quently and make sure it is ready for emer-
gency use at any time.

Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest

specified air pressure will ensure that it can
always be used under any conditions

8-6 For emergencies

 How to change a tyre
(city/high-speed driving, varying load weight, 2. Remove the tyre hanger installation bolt
etc.). cover (B).
CAUTION
 Be careful as you loosen the tyre hanger
installation bolt. If you loosen it too far, the
CAUTION hook may come out and let the spare wheel
 The pressure should be periodically checked fall.
and maintained at the specified pressure
while the tyre is stowed.
4. Lift up the tyre hanger (E) at the section
Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure can
indicated by the arrow in the diagram,
lead to an accident. If you have no choice but
to drive with an insufficient tyre pressure, remove it from the hook (F), lower it, and
keep your speed down and inflate the tyre to then take the tyre off the tyre hanger.
the correct pressure as soon as possible.
(Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on page
10-11.)
3. First, hold the wheel nut wrench as shown 8
in the illustration (C) and loosen the tyre
hanger installation bolt. Then, when it
To remove the spare wheel becomes easier to loosen the bolt, hold the
E00803501927
wheel nut wrench as shown in the illustra-
1. Open the tailgate and open the luggage
tion (D) and continue to loosen the bolt.
floor board (A).

CAUTION
 When removing the tyre hanger from the
hook or hanging it back on the hook, hold the
tyre hanger carefully so that it does not drop
on your feet.

For emergencies 8-7

 How to change a tyre
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
NOTE points (A) shown in the illustration. Use portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
 Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
the jacking point closest to the tyre you of the jack.
near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
wish to change.
slips out of position.

8
4. Insert the jack bar (D) into the wheel nut
To change a tyre wrench (E). Then put the end of the jack
E00803202905 WARNING bar into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in
1. Loosen the wheel nuts a quarter turn with  Set the jack only at the positions shown the illustration.
the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
wheel nuts yet. it could dent your vehicle or the jack the tyre is raised slightly off the ground
might fall over and cause personal injury. surface.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base.

8-8 For emergencies

 How to change a tyre
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
WARNING face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
tyre is raised off the ground. It is danger-
mount the spare tyre.
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
 The jack should not be used for any pur- 7. Finger-tighten the wheel nuts.
pose other than to change a tyre.
 No one should be in your vehicle when CAUTION 8
using the jack.
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
 Do not start or run the engine while your the nuts or they will tighten too much.
vehicle is on the jack. WARNING
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
still on the ground could turn and make (I) facing outboard. If you cannot see the Vehicle with the tapered nuts
your vehicle fall off the jack. valve stem (I), you have installed the
wheel backwards. • Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel parts of the wheel nuts make light con-
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
installed backwards can cause vehicle tact with the seats of the wheel holes and
wrench, then take the wheel off.
damage and result in an accident. the wheel is not loose.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.

For emergencies 8-9

 How to change a tyre
8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the
wheel nut wrench anticlockwise until the
CAUTION
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension for
tyre touches the ground.
extra force in the wheel nut wrench. If you
do so, you will tighten the nut too much.

10. Lower and remove the jack, then store the

jack, flat tyre, and chocks. Have your
damaged tyre repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
11. Check your tyre inflation pressure at the
next gas station. The correct tyre pres-
Vehicle with the flange nuts sures are shown on the driver’s door label.
8 See the illustration.
• Tighten the wheel nuts until the flanges 9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the
of the wheel nuts touch the wheel and illustration until each nut has been tight-
the wheel is not loose. ened to the torque listed here.

Tightening torque 88 to 108 N•m

CAUTION
 After changing the tyre and driving the vehi-
cle approximately 1000 km, retighten the
NOTE wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
 If all four aluminium wheels are changed to come loose.
steel wheels, use tapered nuts.

8-10 For emergencies

 How to change a tyre

CAUTION
 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
after changing the tyre, we recommend you
to have the tyres checked for balance.
 Do not mix one type of tyre with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.

To store the spare wheel

E00803701802

1. Put the tyre on the centre of the tyre

hanger, with the wheel surface facing CAUTION CAUTION
upwards.  Do not attach the hook to any part of the tyre  After storing the spare wheel, check that the 8
hanger other than the correct position. Other- tyre hanger is securely locked in place. If the
CAUTION wise the hook could damage the vehicle tyre hanger is not securely locked in place, it
 Storing the tyre with the wheel surface fac- body, or the tyre could fall while driving and could come loose and fall while you are driv-
ing down may damage the wheel or tyre cause an accident. ing and cause an accident.
hanger. If you find any damage on a spare  When removing the tyre hanger from the
tyre, do not use the tyre and contact an 3. Open the tailgate. hook or hanging it back on the hook, hold the
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. tyre hanger carefully so that it does not drop
First, hold the wheel nut wrench as shown
on your feet.
in the illustration (C) and tighten the tyre
2. Lift up the tyre hanger (A) and hang it on hanger installation bolt. Then, hold the
the hook (B). wheel nut wrench as shown in the illustra- 4. Install the tyre hanger installation bolt
tion (D) and tighten the bolt securely. cover.
5. Close the luggage floor board.

To store the tools and jack

E00803801278

Reverse the removing procedure when stor-

ing the jack, jack bar and wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-5.

For emergencies 8-11

 Towing
The regulations concerning towing may differ
Towing from country to country. It is recommended
Towing the vehicle by a tow
E00801506641
that you obey the regulations of the area truck
where you are driving your vehicle.
If your vehicle needs to be
CAUTION
towed  This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
have it done by your authorised age the bumper and front end.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or a com-  Do not tow the vehicle with the driving
mercial tow truck service. wheels on the ground (Type B) as illustrated.
This could result in the driving system dam-
In the following cases, transport the vehicle age.
8 using a tow truck.  If the transmission is malfunctioning or dam-
aged, transport the vehicle with the driving
 The engine runs but the vehicle does not wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as
move, or an abnormal noise is produced. illustrated.
 Inspection of the vehicle’s underside  If the vehicle is towed with the operation
reveals that oil or some other fluid is leak- mode in ON and only the front wheels raised
ing. off the ground (Type C), the ASC may oper-
ate, resulting in an accident. When towing
the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep
If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to
the operation mode in ACC or OFF.
tow the vehicle.
Please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer or a commercial tow truck
service for assistance.
Towing with front wheels off the
ground (Type C)
Only when you cannot receive a towing ser-
vice from an authorised MITSUBISHI Release the parking brake.
MOTORS dealer or commercial tow truck Place the selector lever in the “N” (NEU-
service, tow your vehicle carefully in accord- TRAL) position.
ance with the instructions given in “Emer-
gency towing” in this part.
8-12 For emergencies
 Towing

Emergency towing Type 2 NOTE

E00804201194  Using a wire rope or metal chain can result
If towing service is not available in an emer- in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to
use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire
gency, your vehicle may be temporarily
rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any
towed by a rope secured to the towing hook.
point where it touches the vehicle body.
In case of your vehicle is to be towed by
 Use care that the tow rope is kept as horizon-
another vehicle or your vehicle tows another tal as possible. An angled tow rope can dam-
vehicle, pay careful attention to the following age the vehicle body.
points.  Secure the tow rope to the same side towing
hook, to keep the tow rope as straight as pos-
If your vehicle is to be towed by 3. Use the jack bar to firmly attach the tow- sible.
another vehicle ing hook. 5. Keep the engine running.
If the engine is not running, perform the
8
1. Take out the towing hook and jack bar. following operation to unlock the steering
Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-5. wheel.
2. Cover the end of the jack bar (A) with [Except for vehicles with the keyless
cloth and use it to remove the lid from the operation system]
front bumper. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
Type 1 tion.
[For vehicles with the keyless operation
system]
Put the operation mode in ON.

4. Secure the tow rope to the front towing WARNING

hook.  When the engine is not running, the brake
booster and power steering system do not
NOTE operate. This means higher brake depres-
 Using any part other than the designated sion force and higher steering effort are
towing hook could result in damage to vehi- required. Therefore, vehicle operation is
cle body. very difficult.

For emergencies 8-13

 Towing
for “If your vehicle is to be towed by another
CAUTION CAUTION vehicle”.
 Do not leave the ignition switch in the  The person in the vehicle being towed must
“LOCK” position or the operation mode in pay attention to the brake lamps of the tow-
OFF. The steering wheel will lock, causing ing vehicle and make sure the rope never Type 1
loss of control. becomes slack.
 When a vehicle is to be towed by another
6. Place the selector lever in the “N” (NEU- vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make
sure that the towing speed and distance given
TRAL) position.
below are never exceeded, avoiding damage
7. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if to the transmission.
required by law. (Follow the local driving
laws and regulations) Towing speed: 40 km/h
8. During towing make sure that close con- Towing distance: 40 km
8 tact is maintained between the drivers of
For the towing speed and the towing dis-
both vehicles, and that the vehicles travel
tance, follow the local driving laws and regu-
at low speed. Type 2
lations.

WARNING
 Avoid sudden braking, acceleration and 9. When finished towing, remove the towing
steering wheel movements; such driving hook, and stow it in the specified location.
operation could cause damage to the tow- Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-5.
ing hook or towing rope. When installing the bumper lid, align the
People in the vicinity could be injured as a hook with the cut out area on the vehicle,
result. and firmly insert.
 When going down a long slope, the brakes
may overheat, reducing effectiveness.
Have your vehicle transported by a tow
If your vehicle tows another vehi-
truck. cle NOTE
 Do not use the tie-down hook (D) for towing.
This hook is provided only for the purpose of
Remove the bumper lid on the rear bumper,
transporting the vehicle itself.
and then install the towing hook (C) and use Using any part other than the designated
it for towing. The instructions are the same as towing hook (C) could result in damage to
vehicle body.

8-14 For emergencies

 Operation under adverse driving conditions
This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance  Depressing the brake pedal during travel
NOTE on the road, resulting in loss of steering on snowy or icy roads may cause tyre
 Do not tow a vehicle heavier than your own
stability and braking capability. slippage and skidding. When traction
vehicle.
between the tyres and the road is reduced
To cope with this, observe the following the wheels may skid and the vehicle can-
items: not readily be brought to a stop by con-
(a) Drive your vehicle at a slow speed. ventional braking techniques. Braking
(b) Do not drive on worn tyres. will differ, depending upon whether you
(c) Always maintain the specified tyre have anti-lock brake system (ABS). As
inflation pressures. your vehicle is equipped with ABS, brake
by pressing the brake pedal hard, and
keeping it pressed.
 Allow extra distance between your vehi-
CAUTION 8
Operation under adverse  Do not drive on flooded roads, through deep
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and
avoid sudden braking.
driving conditions puddles, and so on. If you inevitably had to
 Accumulation of ice on the braking sys-
E00801704287
run on a flooded road and the vehicle was
exposed to water, be sure to have your vehi- tem can cause the wheels to lock. Pull
cle inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI away from a standstill slowly after con-
On a flooded road MOTORS dealer. firming safety around the vehicle.

 If water enters the brake discs, such as

when driving through puddles, the brakes CAUTION
may temporarily become ineffective. In
On a snow-covered or frozen  Do not press the accelerator pedal rapidly. If
such cases, lightly depress the brake pedal road the wheels break free of the ice, the vehicle
to see if the brakes operate properly. If could suddenly start moving and possibly
 Avoid high-speed operation, sudden cause an accident.
they do not, lightly depress the pedal sev-
acceleration, abrupt brake application and
eral times while driving in order to dry the
sharp cornering.
brake pads.
 When driving in rain or on a road with On a bumpy or rutted road
many puddles a layer of water may form
between the tyres and the road surface. Drive as slow as possible when driving on
bumpy or rutted roads.

For emergencies 8-15

 Operation under adverse driving conditions

CAUTION
 The impact on tyres and/or wheels when
driving on a bumpy or rutted road can dam-
age the tyre and/or wheel.

8-16 For emergencies

Vehicle care

Vehicle care precautions ..................................................................9-2

Cleaning the interior of your vehicle ...............................................9-2
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle ..............................................9-3

9
 Vehicle care precautions
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
Vehicle care precautions Cleaning the interior of your well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter-
E00900102034
vehicle gent thoroughly.
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, E00900201878
it is necessary to perform regular mainte- After cleaning the interior of your vehicle NOTE
nance using the proper procedures. with water, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
Always maintain your vehicle in compliance a shady, well-ventilated area. tectants containing silicones or wax.
with any environmental pollution control reg- Such products can cause discolouring and,
ulations. when applied to the instrument panels or
Carefully select the materials used for wash- NOTE other parts, may cause reflections on the
ing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain  To clean the inside of the tailgate window, windscreen and obscure vision.
always use a soft cloth and wipe the window Also, if such products get on the switches of
corrosives.
glass along the demister heater element so as the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a ure of these accessories.
not to cause damage.
specialist for the selection of these materials.  Do not use synthetic fiber or dry cloth. They
9 can cause discolouring or damaging the sur-
CAUTION CAUTION face.
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Always  Do not use organic substances (solvents,  Do not place a deodorizer on the instrument
follow the instructions of the cleaning prod- benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or panel or near lamps and instruments. The
uct supplier. alkaline or acidic solutions. ingredients for deodorizer can cause discol-
 To avoid damage, never use the following to These chemicals can cause discolouring, ouring or cracking.
clean your vehicle. staining or cracking of the surface.
• Petrol If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
• Paint Thinner sure their ingredients do not include the sub- Upholstery
• Benzine stances mentioned above. E00900501233

• Kerosene 1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-

• Turpentine cle, handle the upholstery carefully and
• Naphtha Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and keep the interior clean.
• Lacquer Thinner flocked parts
• Carbon Tetrachloride E00900301619
• Nail Polish Remover 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
• Acetone soaked in a mild soap and water solution.

9-2 Vehicle care

 Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the paint coat and body of your vehicle if left
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
NOTE in prolonged contact.
 Remove dirty patches or oil substances
leather should be cleaned with an appro- Frequent washing and waxing is the best way
quickly as they can stain genuine leather.
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be to protect your vehicle from this damage.
 The genuine leather surface may harden and
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a This will also be effective in protecting it
shrink if it is exposed to direct rays of the
mild soap and water solution. sun for long hours. When your vehicle is from environmental elements such as rain,
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum parked, place it in the shade as much as pos- snow, salt air, etc.
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet sible. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by  When the temperature of the vehicle interior Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
lightly dabbing with a clean colourfast rises in summer, vinyl products left on the water to remove dust. Next, using an ample
cloth and stain remover. genuine leather seat may deteriorate and amount of clean water and a car washing
stick to the seat. brush or sponge, wash the vehicle from top to
bottom.
Genuine leather* Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
E00900602042 Cleaning the exterior of Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a your vehicle cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully
9
soft cloth soaked in a mild soap and water E00900701293 clean the joints and flanges of the doors, bon-
solution. If the following is left on your vehicle, it may net and other sections where dirt is likely to
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out cause corrosion, discolouration and stains, remain.
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter- wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
gent thoroughly.
3. Apply leather protecting agent to the gen-  Seawater, road deicing products.
CAUTION
uine leather surface.  When washing the under side of your vehicle
 Soot and dust, iron powder from factories,
or wheel, be careful not to injure your hands.
chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal-
 Refrain from excessively using a car wash as
NOTE tar, etc.). its brushes may scratch the paint surface,
 If genuine leather is wet with water or is
 Droppings from birds, carcasses of causing it to lose its gloss. Scratches will be
washed in water, wipe off water as quickly as insects, tree sap, etc. especially visible on darker coloured vehi-
possible with a dry, soft cloth. cles.
If left damp, mildew may grow. Washing
 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
E00900904502
alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents
may discolour the genuine leather surface. Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
Be sure to use neutral detergents. picked up from the road surface can damage

Vehicle care 9-3

 Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle

CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 Never spray or splash water on the electrical  Using an automatic car wash, pay attention  To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
components in the engine compartment. to the following items, referring to the on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be
Doing so could have an adverse effect on the owner’s manual or consulting a car wash treated with silicone spray.
engine startability. operator. If the following procedure is not
Exercise caution also when washing the followed, it could result in damage to your
underbody; be careful not to spray water into vehicle.
the engine compartment.
Waxing
• The outside rear-view mirrors are retracted.
E00901002115
 Some types of hot water washing equipment • The pole antenna is removed. For details,
apply high pressure and heat to the vehicle. refer to “Antenna: To remove” on page Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the
They may cause heat distortion and damage 7-30. adherence of dust and road chemicals to the
to the vehicle resin parts and may result in • The wiper arms are secured in place with paintwork. Apply a wax solution after wash-
flooding of the vehicle interior. tape. ing the vehicle, or at least once every three
Therefore; • If your vehicle is equipped with a roof rails, months to assist displacing of water.
• Maintain a distance of approximately 70 cm consult a car wash operator before using the Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
9 or more between the vehicle body and the car wash. You should wax after the surfaces have
washing nozzle.
cooled.
• When washing around the door glass, hold
During cold weather For information on how to use wax refer to
the nozzle at a distance of more than 70 cm
and at right angles to the glass surface.
the owner’s manual of the wax.
 After washing the vehicle, drive the vehicle The salt and other chemicals spread on the
slowly while lightly depressing the brake roads in some areas in winter can have a CAUTION
pedal several times in order to dry out the harmful effect on the vehicle body. You  Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
brakes. should therefore wash the vehicle as often as should not be used.
Leaving the brakes wet could result in
possible in accordance with our care-instruc-
reduced braking performance. Also, there is
tions. It is recommended to have a preserva-
a possibility that they could freeze up or
become inoperative due to rust, rendering the tive applied and the underfloor protection Polishing
vehicle unable to move. checked before and after the cold weather E00901101236

season. The vehicle should only be polished if the

After washing your vehicle, wipe off all paintwork has become stained or lost its lus-
water drops from the rubber parts around the tre. Do not polish parts with a mat coating
doors to prevent the doors from freezing. and the plastic bumpers. Doing so could
cause stains or damage the finish.

9-4 Vehicle care

 Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle
the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft
Cleaning plastic parts Aluminium wheels* cloth. Never use a cloth that is used for clean-
E00901301980 E00901501780
ing a painted surface to clean a window. Wax
Use a sponge or chamois leather. 1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprin-
from the painted surface could get on the
If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough kling water on the wheels.
glass and lower glass transparency and visi-
surface of the bumper, moulding or lamps, 2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that can-
bility.
the surface becomes white. In such a case, not be removed easily with water.
wipe it off using lukewarm water and soft Rinse off the neutral detergent after wash-
cloth or chamois leather. ing the wheels. NOTE
3. Dry the wheels thoroughly using a cham-  To clean the inside of the rear window,
ois leather or a soft cloth. always use a soft cloth and wipe the window
CAUTION glass along the demister heater element so as
 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other hard not to cause damage.
tools as they may damage the plastic part CAUTION
surface.  Do not use a brush or other hard implement
 Do not bring the plastic parts into contact on the wheels. Wiper blades 9
with petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engine Doing so could scratch the wheels.
E00901701229
oils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphuric  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
stain or discolour the plastic parts. so could cause the coating on the wheels to grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them off peel or become discoloured or stained. blades. Replace the wiper blades when they
with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam no longer wipe properly. (Refer to page
aqueous solution of neutral detergent then cleaner or by any other means. 10-13.)
immediately rinse the affected parts with  Contact with seawater and road deicer can
water. cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as
soon as possible. Engine compartment
E00902101594

Chrome parts Clean the engine compartment at the begin-

E00901401268 Window glass ning and end of winter. Pay particular atten-
In order to prevent spots and corrosion of E00901601390
tion to flanges, crevices and peripheral parts
chrome parts, wash with water, dry thor- where dust containing road chemicals and
The window glass can normally be cleaned
oughly, and apply a special protective coat- other corrosive materials might collect.
using only a sponge and water.
ing. This should be done more frequently in Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil,
winter. grease, insect carcasses, etc. After washing
Vehicle care 9-5
 Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle
If salt and other chemicals are used on the
roads in your area, clean the engine compart-
ment at least every three months.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical
components in the engine compartment, as
this may cause damage.
Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic
parts and so on into contact with sulphuric
acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack,
stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
the affected parts with plenty of water.
9

9-6 Vehicle care

Maintenance

Service precautions ........................................................................10-2

Catalytic converter .........................................................................10-3
Bonnet ............................................................................................10-3
Engine oil .......................................................................................10-4
Engine coolant ...............................................................................10-5
Washer fluid ...................................................................................10-6
Brake fluid .....................................................................................10-7
Battery ............................................................................................10-8
Tyres ............................................................................................10-10
Wiper blade rubber replacement ..................................................10-13
General maintenance ...................................................................10-14
Fusible links .................................................................................10-15 10
Fuses ............................................................................................10-15
Replacement of lamp bulbs .........................................................10-19
 Service precautions
B- Caution label
Service precautions C- Resistor
WARNING
E01000103097  Do not get under your vehicle with just the
body jack supporting it. Always use auto-
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular WARNING motive jack stands.
intervals serves to preserve the value and  When checking or servicing the inside of  Improper handling of components and
appearance as long as possible. the engine compartment, make sure the materials used in the vehicle can endanger
Maintenance items as described in this engine is switched off and has had a your personal safety. We recommend you
owner’s manual can be performed by the chance to cool down. to consult a specialist for necessary infor-
owner.  If it is necessary to do work in the engine mation.
We recommend you to have the periodic compartment with the engine running, be
inspection and maintenance performed by an especially careful that your clothing, hair, Check items of engine compartment are
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or etc., does not become caught by the cool- located as shown in the figure below.
another specialist. ing fan, drive belts, or other moving parts.
In the event a malfunction or a problem is  After performing the maintenance work,
discovered, we recommend you to have it make sure that no tools or cloths are left
behind in the engine compartment.
checked and repaired. This section contains
If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
10 information on inspection maintenance pro- the vehicle may occur.
cedures that you can do yourself. Follow the  The cooling fan can turn on automatically
instructions and cautions for each of the vari- even if the engine is not running. Turn the
ous procedures. ignition switch to the “LOCK” position or
put the operation mode in OFF to be safe
while you work in the engine compart-
ment.
 Because the resistor (C) may be hot even if 1. Engine oil level gauge
the cooling fan has stopped, do not touch 2. Brake fluid reservoir
the resistor. Burns could result. 3. Engine oil cap
 Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open 4. Washer fluid reservoir
flames around fuel or battery. The fumes 5. Engine coolant reservoir
are flammable.
6. Battery
 Be extremely cautious when working
around the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulphuric acid.
A- Cooling fan

10-2 Maintenance
 Catalytic converter

Catalytic converter Bonnet NOTE

E01000202730 E01000304810  Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in
the original position. In any other position,
The exhaust gas scavenging devices used
the wipers could damage the paint or bonnet.
with catalytic converter are extremely effi- To open
cient for the reduction of noxious gases. The
catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust 1. Pull the release lever towards you to 3. Support the bonnet by inserting the sup-
system. unlock the bonnet. port bar in its slot.
It is important to keep the engine properly
tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and
prevent possible catalyst damage.

WARNING
 As with any vehicle, do not park or oper-
ate this vehicle in areas where combustible
materials such as dry grass or leaves can
come in contact with a hot exhaust since a 10
fire could occur.
 Paint should not be applied to the catalytic
converter.
2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety
lock. CAUTION
 Note that the support bar may disengage the
bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by a strong
NOTE wind.
 Use fuel of the type recommended in “Fuel
 After inserting the support bar into the slot,
selection” on page 2-2.
make sure the bar supports the bonnet
securely from falling down on to your head
or body.

Maintenance 10-3
 Engine oil
important to check the oil level at regular
To close NOTE intervals or before starting a long trip.
 If this does not close the bonnet, release it
1. Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its from a slightly higher position. 1. Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
holder.  Do not press down firmly on the bonnet as 2. Switch off the engine.
2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position doing so could damage it. 3. Wait a few minutes.
approximately 20 cm above the closed 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
position, then let it drop. clean cloth.
3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked Engine oil 5. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes.
by softly lifting the centre of the bonnet. E01000405498 6. Remove the dipstick and confirm that the
oil level is between the marks (A) and
To check and refill engine oil (B).
7. If the oil level is less than the level indi-
cated by the mark (A), remove the cap
and add enough oil to raise the level to
B A between the marks (A) and (B).
8. After adding oil, close the cap securely.
10 9. Confirm the oil level by repeating step 4
to 6.

NOTE
CAUTION  To avoid engine damage, do not overfill by
exceeding the mark (B).
 Be careful that hands or fingers are not
trapped when closing the bonnet.  Be sure to use the specified engine oil and do
A: Minimum level not mix various types of oil.
 Before driving, make sure that the bonnet is B: Maximum level
securely locked. An incompletely locked  When the oil level is checked in step 6
bonnet can suddenly open while driving. above, check it on a low side of the dipstick
This can be extremely dangerous. The engine oil used has a significant effect on because it is different in appearance of oil
the engine’s performance, service life and level in the two sides of the dipstick.
startability. Be sure to use oil of the recom-  The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions,
mended quality and appropriate viscosity.
requiring earlier oil replacement.
All engines consume a certain amount of oil Please refer to the maintenance schedule.
during normal operation. Therefore, it is
10-4 Maintenance
 Engine coolant
• ACEA classification:
NOTE “For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, or
 For handling of used engine oils, refer to
A5/B5”
“Used engine oils safety instructions” on
FULL
page 2-6.
NOTE
Recommended engine oil vis-  Use of additives is not recommended since
they may reduce the effectiveness of addi- LOW
cosity tives already included in the engine oil. It
may result in failure of the mechanical
assembly.
 If those classifications are not available, con-
tact an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.
To add coolant

Engine coolant The cooling system is a closed system and

E01000503727
normally the loss of coolant should be very 10
slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant level
could indicate leakage. If this occurs, have
To check the coolant level the system checked at an authorised
 Select engine oil of the proper SAE vis- MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon as
cosity number according to the atmos- A transparent coolant reserve tank (A) is possible.
pheric temperature. located in the engine compartment. If the level should drop below the “L” (LOW)
SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30, and The coolant level in this tank should be kept level on the reserve tank, open the lid and add
5W-40 engine oils can only be used if between the “L” (LOW) and “F” (FULL) coolant.
they meet ACEA A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5 marks when measured while the engine is Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty,
and API SG (or higher) specifications. cold. remove the radiator cap (B) and add coolant
 Use engine oil conforming to the follow- until the level reaches the filler neck.
ing classification:
• API classification: “For service SG” or
higher
• ILSAC certificated oil

Maintenance 10-5
 Washer fluid
concentration of anti-freeze differs depending in the engine or radiator could freeze and
WARNING on the expected ambient temperature. cause severe damage to the engine and/or
 Do not open the radiator cap (B) while the
radiator. Add a sufficient amount of anti-
engine is hot. The coolant system is under Above -35 °C: 50 % concentration of anti- freeze to the coolant to prevent it from freez-
pressure and any hot coolant escaping freeze
could cause severe burns. ing.
Below -35 °C: 60 % concentration of anti- The concentration should be checked before
freeze the start of cold weather and anti-freeze
added to the system if necessary.
Anti-freeze
CAUTION
The engine coolant contains an ethylene gly-
 Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze or
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or
Washer fluid
col anti-corrosion agent. Some parts of the methanol anti-freeze. The use of an improper
E01000702517

engine are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic anti-freeze can cause corrosion of the alu- Open the washer fluid reservoir cap and
changing of the engine coolant is necessary to minium components. check the level of washer fluid.
prevent corrosion of these parts.  Do not use water to adjust the concentration If the level is low, replenish the container
of coolant. with washer fluid.
Use “MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE  Concentrations exceeding 60 % will result in
10 SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT PRE- a reduction of both the anti-freeze and cool-
MIUM” or equivalent*. ing performance thus adversely affecting the
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based engine.
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and  Do not top up with water only.
non-borate coolant with long life hybrid Water by itself reduces the rust-protective
and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and
organic acid technology
has a lower boiling point. It can also cause LOW
damage to the cooling system if it should
freeze. Do not use tap water, as it can cause
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Coolant corrosion and rust formation.
has excellent protection against corrosion and
rust formation of all metals including alumin-
ium and can avoid blockages in the radiator,
During cold weather
heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc.
Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion
agent, the coolant must not be replaced with If the temperatures in your area drop below
plain water even in summer. The required freezing, there is the danger that the coolant

10-6 Maintenance
 Brake fluid
If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
CAUTION Brake fluid length of time, it indicates leaks from the
 Do not use any fluid other than water or E01000802055
brake system.
washer fluid.
If this occurs, we recommend you to have the
Also, do not use soapy water, engine anti-
freeze, or other liquid instead of washer
To check the fluid level vehicle checked.
fluid.
Other liquids could cause streaking on the The fluid level must be between the “MAX” Fluid type
vehicle’s painted surfaces, damage the and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
washer pump, or clog the nozzle, leading to
the washer fluid not spraying. Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or
DOT4 from a sealed container. The brake
fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in
NOTE the brake fluid will adversely affect the brake
 The washer fluid container serves the wind- system, reducing the performance.
screen and rear window.
 If the washer fluid level in the washer fluid WARNING
reservoir is at the LOW mark, you can
replenish with approximately 2 litres of
 Take care in handling brake fluid as it is 10
harmful to the eyes, may irritate your skin
washer fluid. and will damage to painted surfaces. Wipe
up spills immediately. If brake fluid gets
on your hands or in your eyes, flush imme-
The fluid level is monitored by a float. When
During cold weather the fluid level falls below the “MIN” mark,
diately with clean water. Follow up with a
doctor as necessary.
the brake warning lamp lights up.
To ensure proper operation of the washers at The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
low temperatures, use a fluid containing an brake pads, but this does not indicate any
anti-freezing agent.
CAUTION
abnormality.
 Use only the specified brake fluid.
Do not mix or add different brand of brake
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
fluid to prevent chemical reaction.
checked when doing other work under the Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
bonnet. The brake system should also be mix with, or get into the brake fluid.
checked for leaks at the same time. This will damage the seals.

Maintenance 10-7
 Battery

CAUTION NOTE WARNING

 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to prevent  After replacing the battery, the electronic  Shield eyes
the brake fluid from deteriorating except control system data for the automatic trans-
maintenance. mission, etc., will be erased. As a result, shift
 Make sure that the projection on the filler shocks may occur.
cap is pointing rearward as shown in the Shift shocks will become smoother after sev- Always wear protective eye goggles when
illustration when the cap is closed. eral changes in speed. working near the battery. Battery electro-
lyte contains sulphuric acid, so getting it
in your eyes is dangerous.
Battery precautions  Battery acid

WARNING Battery electrolyte contains sulphuric

 Note operating instructions
acid, so you must wear gloves and eye pro-
tection when handling the battery.
*: Front of the vehicle If battery electrolyte gets in your eyes or
10  Clean the filler cap before removing and
When you handle the battery, carefully
on your skin, rinse it away with clean
close the cap securely after maintenance. water and immediately see a doctor.
observe the following cautions for safety. If you accidentally swallow battery elec-
 No smoking, no naked flames, no sparks trolyte, immediately see a doctor.
Battery If battery electrolyte splashes on your
E01001203981 clothing or on the vehicle, rinse it off with
lots of water.
The condition of the battery is very important Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away  Explosive gas
for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s from the battery because the battery could
electrical system working properly. Regular explode. Also, do not short-circuit the bat-
inspection and care are especially important tery terminals. Doing so could create
in cold weather. sparks. The battery emits highly explosive hydro-
gen gas. Ventilate when charging the bat-
tery in an enclosed space.

10-8 Maintenance
 Battery
Check the electrolyte level at least once every tive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) ter-
WARNING four weeks, depending on the operating con- minal.
 Keep away from children
ditions.
If the battery is not used, it will discharge by NOTE
itself with time.  Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
Keep it out of reach of children. Check it once every four weeks and charge necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
with low current as necessary. nal of the battery.
 Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the
Checking battery electrolyte
level During cold weather battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.

The capacity of the battery is reduced at low

temperatures. This is an inevitable result of
its chemical and physical properties. This is
why a very cold battery, particularly one that
is not fully charged will only deliver a frac-
tion of the starter current which is normally
available.
10
We recommend you to have the battery
checked before the start of cold weather and,
if necessary, have it charged or replaced.
WARNING
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
This does not only ensures reliable starting,
from the battery because the battery could
The electrolyte level must be between the but a battery which is kept fully charged also
explode.
specified limit on the outside of the battery. has a longer life.
 The battery electrolyte is extremely caus-
Replenish with distilled water as necessary. tic. Do not allow it to come in contact with
The inside of the battery is divided into sev- Disconnection and connection your eyes, skin, clothing, or the painted
eral compartments; remove the cap from each surfaces of the vehicle.
compartment and fill to the upper mark. Do Spilt electrolyte should be flushed imme-
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the diately with ample amounts of water.
not top up beyond the upper mark because
engine, first disconnect the negative (-) termi- Irritation to eyes or skin from contact
spillage during driving could cause damage.
nal and then the positive (+) terminal. When with electrolyte requires immediate medi-
connecting the battery, first connect the posi- cal attention.

Maintenance 10-9
 Tyres

WARNING NOTE
 Ventilate when charging or using the bat-  Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is
tery in an enclosed space. connected, apply terminal protection grease.
To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.
 Check to see if the battery is securely
CAUTION installed and cannot be moved during travel.
 Keep it out of reach of children. Also check each terminal for tightness.
 Never disconnect the battery when the igni-  When the vehicle is to be left unused for a
tion switch is in the “ON” position or the long period of time, remove the battery and
operation mode in ON. Doing so could dam- store it in a place where the battery fluid will
age electric components. not freeze. The battery should be stored only
 Never short-circuit the battery. This could in a fully charged condition.
cause it to overheat and be damaged.
 If the battery is to be quick-charged, first dis-
connect the battery cables. Tyres
 In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to E01001301526

10 disconnect the negative (-) terminal first.

 Always wear protective eye goggles when WARNING
working near the battery.  Driving with tyres that are worn, damaged
 Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic or improperly inflated can lead to a loss of
parts and so on into contact with sulphuric control or blow out of the tyres which can
acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, result in a collision with serious or fatal
stain or discolour them. injury.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft
cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous
solution of neutral detergent then immedi-
ately rinse the affected parts with plenty of
water.

10-10 Maintenance
 Tyres

Tyre inflation pressures

E01001404847

1–5 persons + cargo 6–7 persons + cargo

Tyre size
Front Rear Front Rear
2.3 bar (33 PSI) 2.3 bar (33 PSI) 2.3 bar (33 PSI) 2.8 bar (41 PSI)
185/65R15 88H
[230 kPa] [230 kPa] [230 kPa] [280 kPa]
2.1 bar (30 PSI) 2.1 bar (30 PSI) 2.1 bar (30 PSI) 2.6 bar (38 PSI)
205/55R16 91V
[210 kPa] [210 kPa] [210 kPa] [260 kPa]
2.1 bar (30 PSI) 2.1 bar (30 PSI) 2.1 bar (30 PSI) 2.6 bar (38 PSI)
205/55R17 91V
[210 kPa] [210 kPa] [210 kPa] [260 kPa]

Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.
10
NOTE
 The tyres that can be installed on your vehicle are shown on the driver’s door label. For details, contact an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

Maintenance 10-11
 Tyres
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer to determine
Wheel condition Replacing tyres and wheels the cause of irregular tread wear.
E01001802140 E01007201888

CAUTION Spare tyre used*

 Avoid using different size tyres from the one
listed and the combined use of different
types of tyres, as this can affect driving Front
safety.
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page 11-7.
 Even if a wheel has the same rim size and
offset as the specified type of wheel, its Spare tyre not used
shape may prevent it from being fitted cor-
rectly. We recommend you to consult a spe- Front
cialist before using wheels that you have.
1- Location of the tread wear indicator
2- Tread wear indicator
Tyres that have arrows showing rotation
10 Tyre rotation direction
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other E01001902763
damage. Replace the tyres if there are deep
cuts or cracks. Also check each tyre for Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, Front
pieces of metal or pebbles. road surface conditions and individual
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous driver’s driving habits. To equalise the wear
because of the greater chance of skidding or and help extend tyre life, it is recommended
hydroplaning. The tread depth of the tyres to rotate the tyres immediately after discovery
of abnormal wear, or whenever the wear dif- *: If the spare tyre wheel differs from the
must exceed 1.6 mm in order for the tyres to standard tyre wheel, do not perform tyre
meet the minimum requirement for use. ference between the front and rear tyres is
recognisable. rotation using a spare wheel.
Tread wear indicators will appear on the sur-
face of the tyre as the tyre wears, thereby When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear
indicating that the tyre no longer meets the and damage. Abnormal wear is usually
minimum requirement for use. When these caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper
wear indicators appear, the tyres must be wheel alignment, out of balance wheel, or
replaced with new ones. severe braking. Consult an authorised

10-12 Maintenance
 Wiper blade rubber replacement

CAUTION Wiper blade rubber replace-

 If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating the
correct direction of rotation, swap the front
ment
E01002601685
and rear tyres on the left-hand side of the
vehicle and the front and rear tyres on the
right-hand side of the vehicle separately. Windscreen wiper blades
Keep each tyre on its original side of the
vehicle. When fitting the tyres, make sure 1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
the arrows point in the direction in which the 2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A)
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- disengages from the hook (B). Pull the
ward. Any tyre whose arrow points in the wiper blade further to remove it.
wrong direction will not perform to its full
potential.

4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, start-

Front ing with the opposite end of the blade
from the stopper. Make sure the hook (B)
10
is fitted correctly in the grooves in the
blade.

NOTE
 If retainers are not supplied with the new
CAUTION wiper blade, use the retainers from the old
 Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the blade.
windscreen. This could damage the glass.
CAUTION 5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B)
 Avoid the combined use of different types of
3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper engages securely with the stopper (A).
tyres.
Using different types of tyres can affect vehi-
blade.
cle performance and safety. Refer to the illustration to ensure that the
retainers are correctly aligned as you
attach them.

Maintenance 10-13
 General maintenance

CAUTION General maintenance

 Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the E01002701703
windows glass; it could damage the glass.
Fuel, engine coolant, oil and
4. Firmly insert the retainer (C) into the
exhaust gas leakage
groove (D) in the wiper blade.
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the
retainers are correctly aligned as you Look under the body of your vehicle to check
insert them into the groove. for fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas
leaks.

WARNING
Rear window wiper blade  If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you
smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle; call
1. Lift the wiper arm off the window glass. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
2. Pull the wiper blade downward to disen- dealer for assistance.
10 gage it from the stopper (A) at the end of
the wiper arm. Pull the wiper blade fur-
ther to remove it. Exterior and interior lamp
3. Slide a new wiper blade through the hook
(B) on the wiper arm.
operation

Operate the combination lamp switch to

check that all lamps are functioning properly.
If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable
NOTE cause is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb.
 If a retainer is not supplied with the new Check the fuses first. If there is no blown
wiper blade, use the retainer from the old fuse, check the lamp bulbs.
blade. For information regarding the inspection and
replacement of the fuses and the bulbs, refer
to “Fuses” on page 10-15 and “Replacement
of lamp bulbs” on page 10-19.

10-14 Maintenance
 Fusible links
If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recom-
mend you to have your vehicle checked and
WARNING
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any
repaired.
other device. Failing to fit the correct fusi-
ble link may result in fire in the vehicle,
Meter, gauge and indica- property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
tor/warning lamps operation

Start the engine and check the operation of all

instruments, gauges and indicator and warn-
Fuses
E01003003677
ing lamps.
If there is anything wrong, we recommend 1. Open the glove box.
you to have your vehicle inspected. Fuse block location 2. Pull the glove box fastener (A), then the
fastener (B), in the directions of the
Hinges and latches lubrication To prevent damage to the electrical system arrows shown in the illustration to remove
due to short-circuiting or overloading, each them.
Check all latches and hinges, and, if neces-
individual circuit is provided with a fuse. 10
There are fuse blocks in the passenger com-
sary, have them lubricated. partment and in the engine compartment.

Fusible links Passenger compartment

E01002901792

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if The fuse block in the passenger compartment
a large current attempts to flow through cer- is located behind the glove box at the position
tain electrical systems. shown in the illustration.
In case of a melted fusible link, we recom-
mend you to have your vehicle inspected.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Passen- 3. Slide the glove box at an angle to unhook
ger compartment fuse location table” on page the hook (C) on each side, and then pull
10-16 and “Engine compartment fuse loca- out the glove box to remove it.
tion table” on page 10-17.

Maintenance 10-15
 Fuses

Fuse load capacity Sym- Capac-

No. Electrical system
E01007702138
bol ities
The fuse capacity and the names of electrical 1 Tail lamp (left) 7.5 A
systems protected by the fuses are indicated 2 Cigarette lighter 15 A
on the back of the glove box and inside of the
fuse block cover (inside of the engine com- 3 Ignition coil 10 A
partment). 4 Starter motor 7.5 A
5 — — —
NOTE
 Spare fuses are provided in the fuse block of 6 Accessory socket 15 A
the engine compartment. Always use a fuse
7 Tail lamp (right) 7.5 A
of the same capacity for replacement.
Engine compartment Outside rear-view
8 7.5 A
mirrors
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is Passenger compartment fuse loca-
located as shown in the illustration. 9 Engine control unit 7.5 A
10 tion table
E01007902244
10 Control unit 7.5 A
11 Rear fog lamp 10 A
12 Central door lock 15 A
13 Room lamp 15 A
14 Rear window wiper 15 A
15 Gauge 7.5 A
16 Relay 7.5 A
17 Rear cooler 10 A
1- Press the tab.
2- Remove the cover. 18 Option 10 A
Demister switch Illu-
19 7.5 A
mination

10-16 Maintenance
 Fuses
Sym- Capac- Engine compartment fuse location Electrical sys-
No. Electrical system No. Symbol Capacity
bol ities table tem
20 Windscreen wiper 25 A E01008002343 Hazard warn-
F2 10 A
ing flasher
21 Reversing lamps 7.5 A
F3 Starter 7.5 A
22 Demister 30 A
Automatic
23 Heater 30 A F4 15 A
transmission
24 — — — F5 — — —
25 Radio 10 A F6 — — —
Electronic con- F7 — — —
26 20 A
trolled unit F8 — — —

 Some fuses may not be installed on your F9 Alternator 7.5 A

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model F10 ETV 15 A
or specifications. 10
 The table above shows the main equip- Air condition-
F11 10 A
ment corresponding to each fuse. ing
Electrical sys-
No. Symbol Capacity F12 Engine control 7.5 A
tem
SBF Stop lamps
Ignition switch 40 A* F13 10 A
1 (Brake lamps)
SBF Electric win- F14 Fuel pump 15 A
30 A*
2 dow control
F15 ENG/POWER 15 A
SBF Anti-lock
30 A* F16 — — —
3 braking system
SBF Anti-lock F17 Fog lamps 15 A
40 A*
4 braking system Daytime run-
F18 10 A
F1 — — — ning lamps

Maintenance 10-17
 Fuses
Electrical sys- 10 A: Option
No. Symbol Capacity 15 A: Cigarette lighter
tem
30 A: Demister
F19 Horn 10 A When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
Headlamp low fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
F20 10 A ble.
beam (right)
Headlamp low
F21 10 A
beam (left) Identification of fuse
E01008101477
F22 — — —
Headlamp Capacity Colour
F23 high beam 10 A 7.5 A Brown 3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table,
(right) check the fuse pertaining to the problem.
10 A Red
Headlamp
15 A Blue
F24 high beam 10 A
(left) 20 A Yellow
10 #1 — Spare fuse 25 A 25 A Natural (White)
#2 — Spare fuse 20 A Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible
30 A
link type)
*: Fusible link 40 A Green (fusible link type)

 Some fuses may not be installed on your

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model Fuse replacement
or specifications. E01007802054
B- Fuse is OK
 The table above shows the main equip- 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off C- Blown fuse
ment corresponding to each fuse. the electrical circuit concerned and place
the ignition switch in the “LOCK” posi-
The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A, tion or put the operation mode in OFF.
10 A, 15 A or 30 A fuses. If one of these 2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the
fuses burns out, substitute with the following inside of the fuse block in the engine com-
fuse. partment.
7.5 A: Outside rear-view mirrors
10-18 Maintenance
 Replacement of lamp bulbs

NOTE Replacement of lamp bulbs CAUTION

 If any system does not function but the fuse E01003102264  Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a
corresponding to that system is normal, there bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is
may be a fault in the system elsewhere. We The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
recommend you to have your vehicle
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new to break the next time the headlamps are
checked. bulb with your bare fingers; the skin oil left operated.
on the glass will evaporate when the bulb gets If the glass surface is dirty, it must be
hot and the vapour will condense on the cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and
4. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by
reflector and dim the surface. refit it after drying thoroughly.
using the fuse puller into the same place
the fuse block.
CAUTION
 Do not install commercially available LED-
type bulbs.
Commercially available LED-type bulbs
could adversely affect the operation of the
vehicle, such as by preventing the lamps and
other vehicle equipment from operating
properly.
10
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
being turned off. NOTE
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool
 If you are unsure of how to carry out the
sufficiently before touching it. You could
work as required, we recommend you to con-
otherwise be burnt.
CAUTION sult a specialist.
 Handle halogen lamp bulb with care. The gas
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
 If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a inside a halogen lamp bulb is highly pressur-
when removing a lamp or lens.
short time, we recommend you to have the ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
electrical system checked to find the cause halogen lamp bulb can cause it to shatter.
and rectify it.
 Never use a fuse with a larger capacity than
specified or a substitute (such as a cable or
foil). Doing so could cause the circuit wires
to overheat and create a fire.

Maintenance 10-19
 Replacement of lamp bulbs

NOTE Outside Vehicles equipped with wheel lip mold-

 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been E01003305919 ings
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
Except for vehicles equipped with wheel
becomes foggy. This is the same phenome-
lip moldings Front
non as when window glass mists up on a
humid day, and does not indicate a functional
problem. Front
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will
remove the fog. However, if water gathers
inside the lamp, we recommend you to have
the lamp checked.

Bulb location and capacity

E01003201659
1- Position lamps: −
CAUTION 2- Headlamps: −
3- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W
10  When replacing a bulb, be sure to use a new 1- Position lamps: −
(PY21W)
bulb of the same type, wattage, and colour. 2- Headlamps: 60/55 W (H4)
If you install a different bulb, the bulb could 4- Front fog lamps: −
3- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W
malfunction or fail to come on and could 5- Side turn-signal lamps: −
(PY21W)
lead to a vehicle fire.
4- Front fog lamps*: 19 W (H16)
5- Side turn-signal lamps: − Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.

NOTE
 The following lamps use an LED instead of a
bulb.
If you need to repair or replace these lamps,
contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
• Position lamps
• Headlamps (LED type)
• Front fog lamps (LED type)

10-20 Maintenance
 Replacement of lamp bulbs

NOTE NOTE Headlamps (halogen bulb)

• Side turn-signal lamps • Tail lamps E01009301740

• Reversing lamps 1. Pull out the connector (A).

Rear
Inside
E01003404001

1- High mounted stop lamp: −

2- Tail lamps: −
3- Stop lamps: 21 W (W21W)
4- Tail lamps: −
10
5- Rear turn-signal lamps: 1- Room lamp (front): 8 W *: Front of the vehicle
21 W (WY21W) 2- Room lamp (rear): 8 W
6- Reversing lamps: − 2. Remove the sealing cover (B).
7- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)

Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.

NOTE
 The following lamps use an LED instead of a
bulb.
If you need to repair or replace these lamps,
contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
• High mounted stop lamp

Maintenance 10-21
 Replacement of lamp bulbs
3. Unhook the spring (C), which secures the 4. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn-
bulb, and then remove the bulb (D).
Front turn-signal lamps ing it anticlockwise while pressing in.
E01003802607

1. To create enough work space, turn the

steering wheel all the way in the direction
opposite to the side you wish to replace.
2. Remove the bolts (A), and then remove
the cover (B).

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse. steps in reverse.

10 NOTE NOTE
 When installing the sealing cover (B), make  When installing the cover, fit the projections
sure that the side of the cover with the arrow
*: Front of the vehicle
(D) into the opening, and then tighten the
is facing up. bolts.
3. Turn the socket (C) anticlockwise to
remove it.

10-22 Maintenance
 Replacement of lamp bulbs

Front fog lamps (halogen bulb)*

E01004003906

1. Remove the bolt (A) on the bottom of the

front bumper.

*: Front of the vehicle

5. Turn the bulb (F) anticlockwise to remove
it.
3. Remove the 3 screws (C) and remove the
lamp unit.
*: Front of the vehicle
10
2. Insert your hand in the bottom of the
cover (B), release the 7 hooks indicated
by the arrows in the illustration, and
remove the cover.

6. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.
4. While holding down the tab (D), pull out
the socket (E).
Rear combination lamps
E01004203012

1. Open the tailgate.

Maintenance 10-23
 Replacement of lamp bulbs
2. Remove the screws (A), and then move
the lamp unit towards the rear of the vehi-
Licence plate lamps
E01004602370
cle to unfix the notch (B) and pins (C) of
1. Remove while pressing the lamp unit (A)
the lamp unit.
to the left side of the vehicle.

E- Stop lamp
F- Rear turn-signal lamp

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

3. When replacing the stop lamp bulb, steps in reverse.
2. Insert a minus screwdriver with the end
10 remove the harness (D) from its holder.
NOTE covered with a cloth or other object to
 When installing the lamp unit, fit the clip (G) press the hook (B) aside and remove the
on the body into the notch (H) in the lamp lens.
unit, and then push the entire lamp unit
straight into the body.

4. Turn the socket anticlockwise and remove

it, and then pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket.

10-24 Maintenance
 Replacement of lamp bulbs

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

NOTE
 When installing the lamp unit, first insert the
end of tab (C) and then align tab (D). 10

Maintenance 10-25
Specifications

Vehicle labelling ............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle performance ......................................................................11-6
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-7
Electrical system ............................................................................11-7
Tyres and wheels ............................................................................11-7
Capacity .........................................................................................11-8

11
 Vehicle labelling

Vehicle labelling
E01100105946

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number is stamped

on the floor under the right side of the front
seat. It is visible by pulling back the carpet
flap as shown in the illustration.
*: Front of the vehicle

11

Engine model/number

The engine model and number are stamped

on the engine cylinder block as shown in the
illustration.

11-2 Specifications
 Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle dimensions
E01100205530

Except for vehicles equipped with wheel lip moldings

Vehicles equipped with pole antenna

11
Vehicles equipped with shark-fin antenna

Specifications 11-3
 Vehicle dimensions
1 Front track 1,520 mm
2 Overall width 1,750 mm
3 Front overhang 820 mm
4 Wheel base 2,775 mm
5 Rear overhang 880 mm
6 Overall length 4,475 mm
7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm*1, 205 mm*2
With pole antenna 1,695 mm*1, 1,700 mm*2
8 Overall height (unladen)
With shark-fin antenna 1,725 mm*1, 1,730 mm*2
9 Rear track 1,510 mm
Body 5.5 m
Minimum turning radius
Wheel 5.2 m

11 *1: Vehicles equipped with 15 inch tyres

*2: Vehicles equipped with 16 inch tyres

11-4 Specifications
 Vehicle dimensions

Vehicles equipped with wheel lip moldings

1 Front track 1,520 mm 11

2 Overall width 1,800 mm
3 Front overhang 825 mm
4 Wheel base 2,775 mm
5 Rear overhang 900 mm
6 Overall length 4,500 mm
7 Ground clearance (unladen) 225 mm
8 Overall height (unladen) 1,750 mm
9 Rear track 1,510 mm
Body 5.5 m
Minimum turning radius
Wheel 5.2 m

Specifications 11-5
 Vehicle performance

NOTE
 The overall width varies depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with wheel lip moldings.
To determine whether your vehicle is equipped with wheel lip moldings, refer to “Exterior - front” on page 1-5.

Vehicle performance
E01100304622

Maximum speed 160 km/h

11

11-6 Specifications
 Engine specifications

Engine specifications
E01100604742

Engine model 4A91

No. of cylinders 4 in line
Total displacement 1,499 cc
Bore 75.0 mm
Stroke 84.8 mm
Camshaft Double overhead
Mixture preparation Electronic injection
Maximum output (EEC net) 77 kW/6,000 rpm
Maximum torque (EEC net) 141 N•m/4,000 rpm

Electrical system
E01100804643

Voltage 12 V
11
Battery Type (JIS) 34B19L
Alternator capacity 95 A
Spark plug type NGK LZFR5BI-11

Tyres and wheels

E01100905465

Tyre 185/65R15 88H 205/55R16 91V 205/55R17 91V

Size 15x5 1/2J 16x6 1/2J 17x6 1/2J
Wheel
Offset (Inset) 46 mm

Specifications 11-7
 Capacity

NOTE
 The tyres that can be installed on your vehicle are shown on the driver’s door label, refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on page 10-11. For details, contact
an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

Capacity
E01101308164

11

No. Item Quantity Lubricants

1 Brake fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Oil pan 3.8 litres
2 Engine oil Refer to page 10-4
Oil filter 0.2 litre
3 Washer fluid 2.5 litres —
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE SUPER
4 Engine coolant [includes 0.65 litre in the reserve tank] 5.0 litres
LONG LIFE COOLANT PREMIUM or equivalent*

11-8 Specifications
 Capacity
*: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology

No. Item Quantity Lubricants

5 Automatic transmission fluid 4.9 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF-MA1

CAUTION
 Use only the MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF-MA1.
Use of a different fluid could damage the transmission.

No. Item Quantity Lubricants

6 Refrigerant (air conditioning) 595 - 635 g HFC-134a

NOTE
 Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for details on charging the refrigerant of air conditioning.
11

Specifications 11-9
Certification
 E09300104732

Information for station service

Capacity 45 litres

Fuel Unleaded petrol octane number

Recommended fuel 90 RON or higher
Refer to the “General information” section for the fuel selection.
Engine oil Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the selection of engine oil.
Tyre inflation pressure Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the tyre inflation pressure.